lemon-0.x: src/work/alpar/attic/texi/texinfo.tex@2d87cefb35b2 (annotated)

alpar@464	1	% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
alpar@464	2	%
alpar@464	3	% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
alpar@464	4	\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
alpar@464	5	%
alpar@464	6	\def\texinfoversion{2003-07-28.08}
alpar@464	7	%
alpar@464	8	% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
alpar@464	9	% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
alpar@464	10	%
alpar@464	11	% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
alpar@464	12	% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
alpar@464	13	% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
alpar@464	14	% your option) any later version.
alpar@464	15	%
alpar@464	16	% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
alpar@464	17	% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
alpar@464	18	% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
alpar@464	19	% General Public License for more details.
alpar@464	20	%
alpar@464	21	% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
alpar@464	22	% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write
alpar@464	23	% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
alpar@464	24	% Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
alpar@464	25	%
alpar@464	26	% In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
alpar@464	27	% You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
alpar@464	28	% what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding!
alpar@464	29	%
alpar@464	30	% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
alpar@464	31	% reports; you can get the latest version from:
alpar@464	32	% ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/texinfo.tex
alpar@464	33	% (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
alpar@464	34	% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
alpar@464	35	% (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org),
alpar@464	36	% and /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
alpar@464	37	%
alpar@464	38	% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
alpar@464	39	%
alpar@464	40	% The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
alpar@464	41	% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
alpar@464	42	%
alpar@464	43	% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
alpar@464	44	% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
alpar@464	45	% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
alpar@464	46	%
alpar@464	47	% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
alpar@464	48	% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
alpar@464	49	% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
alpar@464	50	% tex foo.texi
alpar@464	51	% texindex foo.??
alpar@464	52	% tex foo.texi
alpar@464	53	% tex foo.texi
alpar@464	54	% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
alpar@464	55	% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
alpar@464	56	% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
alpar@464	57	% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
alpar@464	58	%
alpar@464	59	% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
alpar@464	60	% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
alpar@464	61	% full Texinfo distribution.
alpar@464	62
alpar@464	63	\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
alpar@464	64
alpar@464	65	% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
alpar@464	66	% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
alpar@464	67	% they might have appeared in the input file name.
alpar@464	68	\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
alpar@464	69	\catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
alpar@464	70
alpar@464	71	\message{Basics,}
alpar@464	72	\chardef\other=12
alpar@464	73
alpar@464	74	% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
alpar@464	75	% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
alpar@464	76	\let\+ = \relax
alpar@464	77
alpar@464	78	% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
alpar@464	79	\let\ptexb=\b
alpar@464	80	\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
alpar@464	81	\let\ptexc=\c
alpar@464	82	\let\ptexcomma=\,
alpar@464	83	\let\ptexdot=\.
alpar@464	84	\let\ptexdots=\dots
alpar@464	85	\let\ptexend=\end
alpar@464	86	\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
alpar@464	87	\let\ptexexclam=\!
alpar@464	88	\let\ptexgtr=>
alpar@464	89	\let\ptexhat=^
alpar@464	90	\let\ptexi=\i
alpar@464	91	\let\ptexindent=\indent
alpar@464	92	\let\ptexlbrace=\{
alpar@464	93	\let\ptexless=<
alpar@464	94	\let\ptexplus=+
alpar@464	95	\let\ptexrbrace=\}
alpar@464	96	\let\ptexslash=\/
alpar@464	97	\let\ptexstar=\*
alpar@464	98	\let\ptext=\t
alpar@464	99
alpar@464	100	% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
alpar@464	101	% starts a new line in the output.
alpar@464	102	\newlinechar = `^^J
alpar@464	103
alpar@464	104	% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
alpar@464	105	\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
alpar@464	106	\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
alpar@464	107	\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
alpar@464	108	\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
alpar@464	109	\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
alpar@464	110	\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
alpar@464	111	\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
alpar@464	112	\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
alpar@464	113	\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
alpar@464	114	\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
alpar@464	115	\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
alpar@464	116	\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
alpar@464	117	\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
alpar@464	118	\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
alpar@464	119	\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
alpar@464	120	\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
alpar@464	121	\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
alpar@464	122	\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
alpar@464	123	\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
alpar@464	124	%
alpar@464	125	\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
alpar@464	126	\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
alpar@464	127	\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
alpar@464	128	\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
alpar@464	129	\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
alpar@464	130	\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
alpar@464	131	\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
alpar@464	132	\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
alpar@464	133	\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
alpar@464	134	\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
alpar@464	135	\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
alpar@464	136	\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
alpar@464	137	%
alpar@464	138	\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
alpar@464	139	\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
alpar@464	140	\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
alpar@464	141	\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
alpar@464	142	\ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
alpar@464	143	\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
alpar@464	144	\ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi
alpar@464	145
alpar@464	146	% In some macros, we cannot use the `\? notation---the left quote is
alpar@464	147	% in some cases the escape char.
alpar@464	148	\chardef\colonChar = `\:
alpar@464	149	\chardef\commaChar = `\,
alpar@464	150	\chardef\dotChar = `\.
alpar@464	151	\chardef\equalChar = `\=
alpar@464	152	\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
alpar@464	153	\chardef\questChar = `\?
alpar@464	154	\chardef\semiChar = `\;
alpar@464	155	\chardef\spaceChar = `\ %
alpar@464	156	\chardef\underChar = `\_
alpar@464	157
alpar@464	158	% Ignore a token.
alpar@464	159	%
alpar@464	160	\def\gobble#1{}
alpar@464	161
alpar@464	162	% True if #1 is the empty string, i.e., called like `\ifempty{}'.
alpar@464	163	%
alpar@464	164	\def\ifempty#1{\ifemptyx #1\emptymarkA\emptymarkB}%
alpar@464	165	\def\ifemptyx#1#2\emptymarkB{\ifx #1\emptymarkA}%
alpar@464	166
alpar@464	167	% Hyphenation fixes.
alpar@464	168	\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
alpar@464	169	\hyphenation{eshell}
alpar@464	170	\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
alpar@464	171	\hyphenation{time-stamp}
alpar@464	172	\hyphenation{white-space}
alpar@464	173
alpar@464	174	% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
alpar@464	175	\newdimen\bindingoffset
alpar@464	176	\newdimen\normaloffset
alpar@464	177	\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
alpar@464	178
alpar@464	179	% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
alpar@464	180	% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
alpar@464	181	% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
alpar@464	182	% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
alpar@464	183	% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
alpar@464	184	%
alpar@464	185	\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
alpar@464	186	\def\loggingall{%
alpar@464	187	\tracingstats2
alpar@464	188	\tracingpages1
alpar@464	189	\tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
alpar@464	190	\tracingparagraphs1
alpar@464	191	\tracingoutput1
alpar@464	192	\tracingmacros2
alpar@464	193	\tracingrestores1
alpar@464	194	\showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
alpar@464	195	\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
alpar@464	196	\tracingscantokens1
alpar@464	197	\tracingifs1
alpar@464	198	\tracinggroups1
alpar@464	199	\tracingnesting2
alpar@464	200	\tracingassigns1
alpar@464	201	\fi
alpar@464	202	\tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
alpar@464	203	\errorcontextlines\maxdimen
alpar@464	204	}%
alpar@464	205
alpar@464	206	% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
alpar@464	207	% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
alpar@464	208	%
alpar@464	209	\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
alpar@464	210	\removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
alpar@464	211	\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
alpar@464	212	\removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
alpar@464	213	\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
alpar@464	214	\removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
alpar@464	215
alpar@464	216	% For @cropmarks command.
alpar@464	217	% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
alpar@464	218	%
alpar@464	219	\newif\ifcropmarks
alpar@464	220	\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
alpar@464	221	%
alpar@464	222	% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
alpar@464	223	% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
alpar@464	224	%
alpar@464	225	\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
alpar@464	226	\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
alpar@464	227	\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
alpar@464	228	\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
alpar@464	229
alpar@464	230	% Main output routine.
alpar@464	231	\chardef\PAGE = 255
alpar@464	232	\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
alpar@464	233
alpar@464	234	\newbox\headlinebox
alpar@464	235	\newbox\footlinebox
alpar@464	236
alpar@464	237	% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
alpar@464	238	% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
alpar@464	239	\def\onepageout#1{%
alpar@464	240	\ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
alpar@464	241	%
alpar@464	242	\ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
alpar@464	243	\else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
alpar@464	244	%
alpar@464	245	% Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
alpar@464	246	% the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
alpar@464	247	\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
alpar@464	248	\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
alpar@464	249	%
alpar@464	250	{%
alpar@464	251	% Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
alpar@464	252	% take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
alpar@464	253	% before the \shipout runs.
alpar@464	254	%
alpar@464	255	\escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
alpar@464	256	\indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
alpar@464	257	\normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
alpar@464	258	% the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
alpar@464	259	\shipout\vbox{%
alpar@464	260	% Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
alpar@464	261	\ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi
alpar@464	262	%
alpar@464	263	\ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
alpar@464	264	\hsize = \outerhsize
alpar@464	265	\vskip-\topandbottommargin
alpar@464	266	\vtop to0pt{%
alpar@464	267	\line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
alpar@464	268	\nointerlineskip
alpar@464	269	\line{%
alpar@464	270	\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
alpar@464	271	\hfill
alpar@464	272	\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
alpar@464	273	}%
alpar@464	274	\vss}%
alpar@464	275	\vskip\topandbottommargin
alpar@464	276	\line\bgroup
alpar@464	277	\hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
alpar@464	278	\ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
alpar@464	279	\vbox\bgroup
alpar@464	280	\fi
alpar@464	281	%
alpar@464	282	\unvbox\headlinebox
alpar@464	283	\pagebody{#1}%
alpar@464	284	\ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
alpar@464	285	% Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
alpar@464	286	% (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
alpar@464	287	% The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
alpar@464	288	\vskip 2\baselineskip
alpar@464	289	\unvbox\footlinebox
alpar@464	290	\fi
alpar@464	291	%
alpar@464	292	\ifcropmarks
alpar@464	293	\egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
alpar@464	294	\hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
alpar@464	295	\vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
alpar@464	296	\boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
alpar@464	297	\vbox to0pt{\vss
alpar@464	298	\line{%
alpar@464	299	\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
alpar@464	300	\hfill
alpar@464	301	\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
alpar@464	302	}%
alpar@464	303	\nointerlineskip
alpar@464	304	\line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
alpar@464	305	}%
alpar@464	306	\egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
alpar@464	307	\fi
alpar@464	308	}% end of \shipout\vbox
alpar@464	309	}% end of group with \normalturnoffactive
alpar@464	310	\advancepageno
alpar@464	311	\ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
alpar@464	312	}
alpar@464	313
alpar@464	314	\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
alpar@464	315
alpar@464	316	\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
alpar@464	317	{\catcode`\@ =11
alpar@464	318	\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
alpar@464	319	% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
alpar@464	320	\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
alpar@464	321	\rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
alpar@464	322	\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
alpar@464	323	\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
alpar@464	324	\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
alpar@464	325	}
alpar@464	326
alpar@464	327	% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
alpar@464	328	% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
alpar@464	329	% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
alpar@464	330	%
alpar@464	331	\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
alpar@464	332	\def\nstop{\vbox
alpar@464	333	{\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
alpar@464	334	\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
alpar@464	335	\def\nsbot{\vbox
alpar@464	336	{\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
alpar@464	337
alpar@464	338	% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
alpar@464	339	% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
alpar@464	340	% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
alpar@464	341	%
alpar@464	342	\def\parsearg#1{%
alpar@464	343	\let\next = #1%
alpar@464	344	\begingroup
alpar@464	345	\obeylines
alpar@464	346	\futurelet\temp\parseargx
alpar@464	347	}
alpar@464	348
alpar@464	349	% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
alpar@464	350	% the like), remove it and recurse. Otherwise, we're done.
alpar@464	351	\def\parseargx{%
alpar@464	352	% \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
alpar@464	353	\ifx\obeyedspace\temp
alpar@464	354	\expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
alpar@464	355	\else
alpar@464	356	\expandafter\parseargline
alpar@464	357	\fi
alpar@464	358	}
alpar@464	359
alpar@464	360	% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
alpar@464	361	{\obeyspaces %
alpar@464	362	\gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
alpar@464	363
alpar@464	364	{\obeylines %
alpar@464	365	\gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
alpar@464	366	\endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
alpar@464	367	%
alpar@464	368	% First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
alpar@464	369	% Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
alpar@464	370	\argremovec #1\c\relax %
alpar@464	371	\expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
alpar@464	372	%
alpar@464	373	% Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
alpar@464	374	\expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
alpar@464	375	}%
alpar@464	376	}
alpar@464	377
alpar@464	378	% Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
alpar@464	379	% do that for us. The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
alpar@464	380	% in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
alpar@464	381	% just to delimit the argument to the \c.
alpar@464	382	\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
alpar@464	383	\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
alpar@464	384
alpar@464	385	% \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
alpar@464	386	% @end itemize @c foo
alpar@464	387	% will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
alpar@464	388	% `itemize'. Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
alpar@464	389	% result to \toks0.
alpar@464	390	%
alpar@464	391	% This loses if there are any other active characters besides spaces
alpar@464	392	% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
alpar@464	393	% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands. (If it ever
alpar@464	394	% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
alpar@464	395	% here.) But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
alpar@464	396	% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
alpar@464	397	% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
alpar@464	398	%
alpar@464	399	\def\removeactivespaces#1{%
alpar@464	400	\begingroup
alpar@464	401	\ignoreactivespaces
alpar@464	402	\edef\temp{#1}%
alpar@464	403	\global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
alpar@464	404	\endgroup
alpar@464	405	}
alpar@464	406
alpar@464	407	% Change the active space to expand to nothing.
alpar@464	408	%
alpar@464	409	\begingroup
alpar@464	410	\obeyspaces
alpar@464	411	\gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
alpar@464	412	\endgroup
alpar@464	413
alpar@464	414
alpar@464	415	\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
alpar@464	416
alpar@464	417	%% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
alpar@464	418	%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
alpar@464	419	\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
alpar@464	420	\def\ENVcheck{%
alpar@464	421	\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
alpar@464	422	\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
alpar@464	423
alpar@464	424	% @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now.
alpar@464	425	\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
alpar@464	426
alpar@464	427	\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
alpar@464	428
alpar@464	429	\def\beginxxx #1{%
alpar@464	430	\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
alpar@464	431	{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
alpar@464	432	\csname #1\endcsname\fi}
alpar@464	433
alpar@464	434	% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
alpar@464	435	%
alpar@464	436	\def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
alpar@464	437	\def\endxxx #1{%
alpar@464	438	\removeactivespaces{#1}%
alpar@464	439	\edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
alpar@464	440	%
alpar@464	441	\expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
alpar@464	442	\expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
alpar@464	443	% There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
alpar@464	444	\errhelp = \EMsimple
alpar@464	445	\errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
alpar@464	446	\else
alpar@464	447	\unmatchedenderror\endthing
alpar@464	448	\fi
alpar@464	449	\else
alpar@464	450	% Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
alpar@464	451	\csname E\endthing\endcsname
alpar@464	452	\fi
alpar@464	453	}
alpar@464	454
alpar@464	455	% There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started. Give an error.
alpar@464	456	%
alpar@464	457	\def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
alpar@464	458	\errhelp = \EMsimple
alpar@464	459	\errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
alpar@464	460	}
alpar@464	461
alpar@464	462	% Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
alpar@464	463	%
alpar@464	464	\def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
alpar@464	465	\expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
alpar@464	466	}
alpar@464	467
alpar@464	468
alpar@464	469	%% Simple single-character @ commands
alpar@464	470
alpar@464	471	% @@ prints an @
alpar@464	472	% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
alpar@464	473	\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
alpar@464	474
alpar@464	475	% This is turned off because it was never documented
alpar@464	476	% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
alpar@464	477	%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
alpar@464	478	%% but suppressing ligatures.
alpar@464	479	%\def\`{{`}}
alpar@464	480	%\def\'{{'}}
alpar@464	481
alpar@464	482	% Used to generate quoted braces.
alpar@464	483	\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
alpar@464	484	\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
alpar@464	485	\let\{=\mylbrace
alpar@464	486	\let\}=\myrbrace
alpar@464	487	\begingroup
alpar@464	488	% Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
alpar@464	489	% and @{ and @} for the aux file.
alpar@464	490	\catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
alpar@464	491	\catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
alpar@464	492	\catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
alpar@464	493	!gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
alpar@464	494	!gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
alpar@464	495	!gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
alpar@464	496	!gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
alpar@464	497	!endgroup
alpar@464	498
alpar@464	499	% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
alpar@464	500	% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
alpar@464	501	\let\, = \c
alpar@464	502	\let\dotaccent = \.
alpar@464	503	\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
alpar@464	504	\let\tieaccent = \t
alpar@464	505	\let\ubaraccent = \b
alpar@464	506	\let\udotaccent = \d
alpar@464	507
alpar@464	508	% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
alpar@464	509	% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
alpar@464	510	\def\questiondown{?`}
alpar@464	511	\def\exclamdown{!`}
alpar@464	512
alpar@464	513	% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
alpar@464	514	\def\imacro{i}
alpar@464	515	\def\jmacro{j}
alpar@464	516	\def\dotless#1{%
alpar@464	517	\def\temp{#1}%
alpar@464	518	\ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
alpar@464	519	\else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
alpar@464	520	\else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
alpar@464	521	\fi\fi
alpar@464	522	}
alpar@464	523
alpar@464	524	% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
alpar@464	525	% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
alpar@464	526	% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
alpar@464	527	% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
alpar@464	528	% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
alpar@464	529	{\catcode`@ = 11
alpar@464	530	% Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
alpar@464	531	% if the definition is written into an index file.
alpar@464	532	\global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
alpar@464	533	\gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
alpar@464	534	}
alpar@464	535
alpar@464	536	% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
alpar@464	537	\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
alpar@464	538
alpar@464	539	% @* forces a line break.
alpar@464	540	\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
alpar@464	541
alpar@464	542	% @/ allows a line break.
alpar@464	543	\let\/=\allowbreak
alpar@464	544
alpar@464	545	% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
alpar@464	546	\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
alpar@464	547
alpar@464	548	% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
alpar@464	549	\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
alpar@464	550
alpar@464	551	% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
alpar@464	552	\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
alpar@464	553
alpar@464	554	% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
alpar@464	555	% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
alpar@464	556	% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
alpar@464	557	\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
alpar@464	558
alpar@464	559	% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
alpar@464	560	% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
alpar@464	561	% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
alpar@464	562	% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
alpar@464	563	% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
alpar@464	564	% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
alpar@464	565	% the text is small, which looks bad.
alpar@464	566	%
alpar@464	567	% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
alpar@464	568	% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
alpar@464	569	% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
alpar@464	570	% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
alpar@464	571	% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
alpar@464	572	% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
alpar@464	573	%
alpar@464	574	\newbox\groupbox
alpar@464	575	\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
alpar@464	576	%
alpar@464	577	\def\group{\begingroup
alpar@464	578	\ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
alpar@464	579	\errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
alpar@464	580	\errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
alpar@464	581	\fi
alpar@464	582	%
alpar@464	583	% The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
alpar@464	584	% depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
alpar@464	585	% next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it. (See p.82 of
alpar@464	586	% the TeXbook.) Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
alpar@464	587	% above. But it's pretty close.
alpar@464	588	\def\Egroup{%
alpar@464	589	\egroup % End the \vtop.
alpar@464	590	% \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
alpar@464	591	\dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
alpar@464	592	% \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
alpar@464	593	\dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
alpar@464	594	% if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
alpar@464	595	% group, force a page break.
alpar@464	596	\ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
alpar@464	597	\ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
alpar@464	598	\page
alpar@464	599	\fi
alpar@464	600	\fi
alpar@464	601	\copy\groupbox
alpar@464	602	\endgroup % End the \group.
alpar@464	603	}%
alpar@464	604	%
alpar@464	605	\setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
alpar@464	606	% We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
alpar@464	607	% the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
alpar@464	608	% Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
alpar@464	609	% and the first line afterwards is too small. But we can't put the
alpar@464	610	% strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
alpar@464	611	% Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
alpar@464	612	\everypar = {\strut}%
alpar@464	613	%
alpar@464	614	% Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
alpar@464	615	% normal interline spacing.
alpar@464	616	\offinterlineskip
alpar@464	617	%
alpar@464	618	% OK, but now we have to do something about blank
alpar@464	619	% lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
alpar@464	620	% just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
alpar@464	621	% turned off the interline space. Simplest is to make them be an
alpar@464	622	% empty paragraph.
alpar@464	623	\ifx\par\lisppar
alpar@464	624	\edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
alpar@464	625	%
alpar@464	626	% Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
alpar@464	627	\obeylines
alpar@464	628	\fi
alpar@464	629	%
alpar@464	630	% Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
alpar@464	631	% @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
alpar@464	632	% end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
alpar@464	633	% the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
alpar@464	634	% should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
alpar@464	635	% manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
alpar@464	636	\comment
alpar@464	637	}
alpar@464	638	%
alpar@464	639	% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
alpar@464	640	% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
alpar@464	641	%
alpar@464	642	\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
alpar@464	643	group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
alpar@464	644	where each line of input produces a line of output.}
alpar@464	645
alpar@464	646	% @need space-in-mils
alpar@464	647	% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
alpar@464	648
alpar@464	649	\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
alpar@464	650
alpar@464	651	\def\need{\parsearg\needx}
alpar@464	652
alpar@464	653	% Old definition--didn't work.
alpar@464	654	%\def\needx #1{\par %
alpar@464	655	%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
alpar@464	656	%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
alpar@464	657	%{\baselineskip=0pt%
alpar@464	658	%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
alpar@464	659	%\prevdepth=-1000pt
alpar@464	660	%}}
alpar@464	661
alpar@464	662	\def\needx#1{%
alpar@464	663	% Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
alpar@464	664	% paragraph.
alpar@464	665	\par
alpar@464	666	%
alpar@464	667	% If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
alpar@464	668	\dimen0 = #1\mil
alpar@464	669	\dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
alpar@464	670	\advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
alpar@464	671	\ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
alpar@464	672	%
alpar@464	673	% Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
alpar@464	674	% normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
alpar@464	675	% And a page break here is fine.
alpar@464	676	\vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
alpar@464	677	%
alpar@464	678	% TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
alpar@464	679	% main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
alpar@464	680	% empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
alpar@464	681	% page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
alpar@464	682	% page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
alpar@464	683	%
alpar@464	684	% There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
alpar@464	685	% page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
alpar@464	686	% sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
alpar@464	687	% almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
alpar@464	688	% good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
alpar@464	689	% example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
alpar@464	690	% document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
alpar@464	691	\penalty9999
alpar@464	692	%
alpar@464	693	% Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
alpar@464	694	\kern -#1\mil
alpar@464	695	%
alpar@464	696	% Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
alpar@464	697	\nobreak
alpar@464	698	\fi
alpar@464	699	}
alpar@464	700
alpar@464	701	% @br forces paragraph break
alpar@464	702
alpar@464	703	\let\br = \par
alpar@464	704
alpar@464	705	% @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
alpar@464	706	% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
alpar@464	707	% font as three actual period characters.
alpar@464	708	%
alpar@464	709	\def\dots{%
alpar@464	710	\leavevmode
alpar@464	711	\hbox to 1.5em{%
alpar@464	712	\hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
alpar@464	713	.\hss.\hss.%
alpar@464	714	\hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
alpar@464	715	}%
alpar@464	716	}
alpar@464	717
alpar@464	718	% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
alpar@464	719	%
alpar@464	720	\def\enddots{%
alpar@464	721	\leavevmode
alpar@464	722	\hbox to 2em{%
alpar@464	723	\hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
alpar@464	724	.\hss.\hss.\hss.%
alpar@464	725	\hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
alpar@464	726	}%
alpar@464	727	\spacefactor=3000
alpar@464	728	}
alpar@464	729
alpar@464	730	% @page forces the start of a new page.
alpar@464	731	%
alpar@464	732	\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
alpar@464	733
alpar@464	734	% @exdent text....
alpar@464	735	% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
alpar@464	736
alpar@464	737	% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
alpar@464	738	% That's how much \exdent should take out.
alpar@464	739	\newskip\exdentamount
alpar@464	740
alpar@464	741	% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
alpar@464	742	\def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
alpar@464	743	\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
alpar@464	744
alpar@464	745	% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
alpar@464	746	\def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
alpar@464	747	\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
alpar@464	748	\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
alpar@464	749
alpar@464	750	% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
alpar@464	751	% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
alpar@464	752	% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'.
alpar@464	753	%
alpar@464	754	\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
alpar@464	755	\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
alpar@464	756	%
alpar@464	757	\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
alpar@464	758	\nobreak
alpar@464	759	\kern-\strutdepth
alpar@464	760	\vtop to \strutdepth{%
alpar@464	761	\baselineskip=\strutdepth
alpar@464	762	\vss
alpar@464	763	% if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
alpar@464	764	% make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
alpar@464	765	\ifx#1l%
alpar@464	766	\llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
alpar@464	767	\else
alpar@464	768	\rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
alpar@464	769	\fi
alpar@464	770	\null
alpar@464	771	}%
alpar@464	772	}}
alpar@464	773	\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
alpar@464	774	\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
alpar@464	775	%
alpar@464	776	% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
alpar@464	777	% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
alpar@464	778	% else use TEXT for both).
alpar@464	779	%
alpar@464	780	\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
alpar@464	781	\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
alpar@464	782	\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
alpar@464	783	\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
alpar@464	784	\def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
alpar@464	785	\def\righttext{#2}%
alpar@464	786	\else
alpar@464	787	\def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
alpar@464	788	\def\righttext{#1}%
alpar@464	789	\fi
alpar@464	790	%
alpar@464	791	\ifodd\pageno
alpar@464	792	\def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
alpar@464	793	\else
alpar@464	794	\def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
alpar@464	795	\fi
alpar@464	796	\temp
alpar@464	797	}
alpar@464	798
alpar@464	799	% @include file insert text of that file as input.
alpar@464	800	% Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
alpar@464	801	\def\include{\begingroup
alpar@464	802	\catcode`\\=\other
alpar@464	803	\catcode`~=\other
alpar@464	804	\catcode`^=\other
alpar@464	805	\catcode`_=\other
alpar@464	806	\catcode`\|=\other
alpar@464	807	\catcode`<=\other
alpar@464	808	\catcode`>=\other
alpar@464	809	\catcode`+=\other
alpar@464	810	\parsearg\includezzz}
alpar@464	811	% Restore active chars for included file.
alpar@464	812	\def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
alpar@464	813	% Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
alpar@464	814	\def\thisfile{#1}%
alpar@464	815	\let\value=\expandablevalue
alpar@464	816	\input\thisfile
alpar@464	817	\endgroup}
alpar@464	818
alpar@464	819	\def\thisfile{}
alpar@464	820
alpar@464	821	% @center line
alpar@464	822	% outputs that line, centered.
alpar@464	823	%
alpar@464	824	\def\center{\parsearg\docenter}
alpar@464	825	\def\docenter#1{{%
alpar@464	826	\ifhmode \hfil\break \fi
alpar@464	827	\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
alpar@464	828	\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
alpar@464	829	\line{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
alpar@464	830	\ifhmode \break \fi
alpar@464	831	}}
alpar@464	832
alpar@464	833	% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
alpar@464	834
alpar@464	835	\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
alpar@464	836	\def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
alpar@464	837
alpar@464	838	% @comment ...line which is ignored...
alpar@464	839	% @c is the same as @comment
alpar@464	840	% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
alpar@464	841
alpar@464	842	\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
alpar@464	843	\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
alpar@464	844	\commentxxx}
alpar@464	845	{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
alpar@464	846
alpar@464	847	\let\c=\comment
alpar@464	848
alpar@464	849	% @paragraphindent NCHARS
alpar@464	850	% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
alpar@464	851	% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
alpar@464	852	% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
alpar@464	853	%
alpar@464	854	\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
alpar@464	855	\def\noneword{none}
alpar@464	856	%
alpar@464	857	\def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent}
alpar@464	858	\def\doparagraphindent#1{%
alpar@464	859	\def\temp{#1}%
alpar@464	860	\ifx\temp\asisword
alpar@464	861	\else
alpar@464	862	\ifx\temp\noneword
alpar@464	863	\defaultparindent = 0pt
alpar@464	864	\else
alpar@464	865	\defaultparindent = #1em
alpar@464	866	\fi
alpar@464	867	\fi
alpar@464	868	\parindent = \defaultparindent
alpar@464	869	}
alpar@464	870
alpar@464	871	% @exampleindent NCHARS
alpar@464	872	% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
alpar@464	873	% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
alpar@464	874	% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
alpar@464	875	\def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent}
alpar@464	876	\def\doexampleindent#1{%
alpar@464	877	\def\temp{#1}%
alpar@464	878	\ifx\temp\asisword
alpar@464	879	\else
alpar@464	880	\ifx\temp\noneword
alpar@464	881	\lispnarrowing = 0pt
alpar@464	882	\else
alpar@464	883	\lispnarrowing = #1em
alpar@464	884	\fi
alpar@464	885	\fi
alpar@464	886	}
alpar@464	887
alpar@464	888	% @firstparagraphindent WORD
alpar@464	889	% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
alpar@464	890	% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
alpar@464	891	% paragraphs.
alpar@464	892	%
alpar@464	893	% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
alpar@464	894	% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
alpar@464	895	% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
alpar@464	896	% By default, we suppress indentation.
alpar@464	897	%
alpar@464	898	\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
alpar@464	899	\newdimen\currentparindent
alpar@464	900	%
alpar@464	901	\def\insertword{insert}
alpar@464	902	%
alpar@464	903	\def\firstparagraphindent{\parsearg\dofirstparagraphindent}
alpar@464	904	\def\dofirstparagraphindent#1{%
alpar@464	905	\def\temp{#1}%
alpar@464	906	\ifx\temp\noneword
alpar@464	907	\let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
alpar@464	908	\else\ifx\temp\insertword
alpar@464	909	\let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
alpar@464	910	\else
alpar@464	911	\errhelp = \EMsimple
alpar@464	912	\errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
alpar@464	913	\fi\fi
alpar@464	914	}
alpar@464	915
alpar@464	916	% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
alpar@464	917	% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
alpar@464	918	%
alpar@464	919	% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
alpar@464	920	% paragraph.
alpar@464	921	%
alpar@464	922	\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
alpar@464	923	\gdef\indent{%
alpar@464	924	\global\let\indent=\ptexindent
alpar@464	925	\global\everypar = {}%
alpar@464	926	}%
alpar@464	927	\global\everypar = {%
alpar@464	928	\kern-\parindent
alpar@464	929	\global\let\indent=\ptexindent
alpar@464	930	\global\everypar = {}%
alpar@464	931	}%
alpar@464	932	}%
alpar@464	933
alpar@464	934
alpar@464	935	% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
alpar@464	936	%
alpar@464	937	\def\asis#1{#1}
alpar@464	938
alpar@464	939	% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
alpar@464	940	% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because we need
alpar@464	941	% to set catcodes according to plain TeX first, to allow for subscripts,
alpar@464	942	% superscripts, special math chars, etc.
alpar@464	943	%
alpar@464	944	\let\implicitmath = $%$ font-lock fix
alpar@464	945	%
alpar@464	946	% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
alpar@464	947	% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
alpar@464	948	% _ within @math be active (mathcode "8000), and distinguish by seeing
alpar@464	949	% if the current family is \slfam, which is what @var uses.
alpar@464	950	%
alpar@464	951	{\catcode\underChar = \active
alpar@464	952	\gdef\mathunderscore{%
alpar@464	953	\catcode\underChar=\active
alpar@464	954	\def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
alpar@464	955	}}
alpar@464	956	%
alpar@464	957	% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
alpar@464	958	% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
alpar@464	959	% this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not
alpar@464	960	% otherwise define @\.
alpar@464	961	%
alpar@464	962	% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
alpar@464	963	\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
alpar@464	964	%
alpar@464	965	\def\math{%
alpar@464	966	\tex
alpar@464	967	\mathcode`\_="8000 \mathunderscore
alpar@464	968	\let\\ = \mathbackslash
alpar@464	969	\mathactive
alpar@464	970	\implicitmath\finishmath}
alpar@464	971	\def\finishmath#1{#1\implicitmath\Etex}
alpar@464	972
alpar@464	973	% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
alpar@464	974	% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an
alpar@464	975	% argument to a command which set the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
alpar@464	976	%
alpar@464	977	{
alpar@464	978	\catcode`^ = \active
alpar@464	979	\catcode`< = \active
alpar@464	980	\catcode`> = \active
alpar@464	981	\catcode`+ = \active
alpar@464	982	\gdef\mathactive{%
alpar@464	983	\let^ = \ptexhat
alpar@464	984	\let< = \ptexless
alpar@464	985	\let> = \ptexgtr
alpar@464	986	\let+ = \ptexplus
alpar@464	987	}
alpar@464	988	}
alpar@464	989
alpar@464	990	% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
alpar@464	991	\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
alpar@464	992	\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
alpar@464	993
alpar@464	994	% @refill is a no-op.
alpar@464	995	\let\refill=\relax
alpar@464	996
alpar@464	997	% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
alpar@464	998	% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
alpar@464	999	% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
alpar@464	1000	%
alpar@464	1001	\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
alpar@464	1002	\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
alpar@464	1003
alpar@464	1004	% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
alpar@464	1005	% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
alpar@464	1006	% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
alpar@464	1007	\def\setfilename{%
alpar@464	1008	\iflinks
alpar@464	1009	\readauxfile
alpar@464	1010	\fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
alpar@464	1011	\openindices
alpar@464	1012	\fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
alpar@464	1013	\global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
alpar@464	1014	%
alpar@464	1015	% If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
alpar@464	1016	% Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
alpar@464	1017	% Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
alpar@464	1018	\openin 1 texinfo.cnf
alpar@464	1019	\ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
alpar@464	1020	\closein1
alpar@464	1021	\temp
alpar@464	1022	%
alpar@464	1023	\comment % Ignore the actual filename.
alpar@464	1024	}
alpar@464	1025
alpar@464	1026	% Called from \setfilename.
alpar@464	1027	%
alpar@464	1028	\def\openindices{%
alpar@464	1029	\newindex{cp}%
alpar@464	1030	\newcodeindex{fn}%
alpar@464	1031	\newcodeindex{vr}%
alpar@464	1032	\newcodeindex{tp}%
alpar@464	1033	\newcodeindex{ky}%
alpar@464	1034	\newcodeindex{pg}%
alpar@464	1035	}
alpar@464	1036
alpar@464	1037	% @bye.
alpar@464	1038	\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
alpar@464	1039
alpar@464	1040
alpar@464	1041	\message{pdf,}
alpar@464	1042	% adobe `portable' document format
alpar@464	1043	\newcount\tempnum
alpar@464	1044	\newcount\lnkcount
alpar@464	1045	\newtoks\filename
alpar@464	1046	\newcount\filenamelength
alpar@464	1047	\newcount\pgn
alpar@464	1048	\newtoks\toksA
alpar@464	1049	\newtoks\toksB
alpar@464	1050	\newtoks\toksC
alpar@464	1051	\newtoks\toksD
alpar@464	1052	\newbox\boxA
alpar@464	1053	\newcount\countA
alpar@464	1054	\newif\ifpdf
alpar@464	1055	\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
alpar@464	1056
alpar@464	1057	\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
alpar@464	1058	\pdffalse
alpar@464	1059	\let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
alpar@464	1060	\let\pdfurl = \gobble
alpar@464	1061	\let\endlink = \relax
alpar@464	1062	\let\linkcolor = \relax
alpar@464	1063	\let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
alpar@464	1064	\else
alpar@464	1065	\pdftrue
alpar@464	1066	\pdfoutput = 1
alpar@464	1067	\input pdfcolor
alpar@464	1068	\def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
alpar@464	1069	\def\imagewidth{#2}%
alpar@464	1070	\def\imageheight{#3}%
alpar@464	1071	% without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
alpar@464	1072	% included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
alpar@464	1073	\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
alpar@464	1074	\immediate\pdfimage
alpar@464	1075	\else
alpar@464	1076	\immediate\pdfximage
alpar@464	1077	\fi
alpar@464	1078	\ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
alpar@464	1079	\ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
alpar@464	1080	\ifnum\pdftexversion<13
alpar@464	1081	#1.pdf%
alpar@464	1082	\else
alpar@464	1083	{#1.pdf}%
alpar@464	1084	\fi
alpar@464	1085	\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
alpar@464	1086	\pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
alpar@464	1087	\fi}
alpar@464	1088	\def\pdfmkdest#1{{\normalturnoffactive \pdfdest name{#1} xyz}}
alpar@464	1089	\def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
alpar@464	1090	\let\linkcolor = \Blue % was Cyan, but that seems light?
alpar@464	1091	\def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
alpar@464	1092	% Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
alpar@464	1093	% come from Petr Olsak
alpar@464	1094	\def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
alpar@464	1095	\else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
alpar@464	1096	\def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
alpar@464	1097	\advance\tempnum by1
alpar@464	1098	\expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
alpar@464	1099	\def\pdfmakeoutlines{{%
alpar@464	1100	\openin 1 \jobname.toc
alpar@464	1101	\ifeof 1\else\begingroup
alpar@464	1102	\closein 1
alpar@464	1103	% Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
alpar@464	1104	\edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
alpar@464	1105	\edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
alpar@464	1106	%
alpar@464	1107	\def\chapentry ##1##2##3{}
alpar@464	1108	\def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
alpar@464	1109	\def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
alpar@464	1110	\def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
alpar@464	1111	\let\appendixentry = \chapentry
alpar@464	1112	\let\unnumbchapentry = \chapentry
alpar@464	1113	\let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry
alpar@464	1114	\let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry
alpar@464	1115	\let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry
alpar@464	1116	\input \jobname.toc
alpar@464	1117	\def\chapentry ##1##2##3{%
alpar@464	1118	\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}}
alpar@464	1119	\def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{%
alpar@464	1120	\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}}
alpar@464	1121	\def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
alpar@464	1122	\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}}
alpar@464	1123	\def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{%
alpar@464	1124	\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}}
alpar@464	1125	\let\appendixentry = \chapentry
alpar@464	1126	\let\unnumbchapentry = \chapentry
alpar@464	1127	\let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry
alpar@464	1128	\let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry
alpar@464	1129	\let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry
alpar@464	1130	%
alpar@464	1131	% Make special characters normal for writing to the pdf file.
alpar@464	1132	%
alpar@464	1133	\indexnofonts
alpar@464	1134	\let\tt=\relax
alpar@464	1135	\turnoffactive
alpar@464	1136	\input \jobname.toc
alpar@464	1137	\endgroup\fi
alpar@464	1138	}}
alpar@464	1139	\def\makelinks #1,{%
alpar@464	1140	\def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
alpar@464	1141	\ifx\params\E
alpar@464	1142	\let\nextmakelinks=\relax
alpar@464	1143	\else
alpar@464	1144	\let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
alpar@464	1145	\ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
alpar@464	1146	\picknum{#1}%
alpar@464	1147	\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}
alpar@464	1148	goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
alpar@464	1149	\linkcolor #1%
alpar@464	1150	\advance\lnkcount by 1%
alpar@464	1151	\endlink
alpar@464	1152	\fi
alpar@464	1153	\nextmakelinks
alpar@464	1154	}
alpar@464	1155	\def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
alpar@464	1156	\def\pn#1{%
alpar@464	1157	\def\p{#1}%
alpar@464	1158	\ifx\p\lbrace
alpar@464	1159	\let\nextpn=\ppn
alpar@464	1160	\else
alpar@464	1161	\let\nextpn=\ppnn
alpar@464	1162	\def\first{#1}
alpar@464	1163	\fi
alpar@464	1164	\nextpn
alpar@464	1165	}
alpar@464	1166	\def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
alpar@464	1167	\def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
alpar@464	1168	\def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
alpar@464	1169	\def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
alpar@464	1170	\def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{\|}%
alpar@464	1171	\ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
alpar@464	1172	\else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
alpar@464	1173	\ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
alpar@464	1174	\advance\filenamelength by 1
alpar@464	1175	\fi
alpar@464	1176	\fi
alpar@464	1177	\nextsp}
alpar@464	1178	\def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1\|\relax}
alpar@464	1179	\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
alpar@464	1180	\let \startlink \pdfannotlink
alpar@464	1181	\else
alpar@464	1182	\let \startlink \pdfstartlink
alpar@464	1183	\fi
alpar@464	1184	\def\pdfurl#1{%
alpar@464	1185	\begingroup
alpar@464	1186	\normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
alpar@464	1187	\let\value=\expandablevalue
alpar@464	1188	\leavevmode\Red
alpar@464	1189	\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
alpar@464	1190	user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
alpar@464	1191	% #1
alpar@464	1192	\endgroup}
alpar@464	1193	\def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
alpar@464	1194	\def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
alpar@464	1195	\def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
alpar@464	1196	\def\poptoks#1#2\|ENDTOKS\|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
alpar@464	1197	\def\maketoks{%
alpar@464	1198	\expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA\|ENDTOKS\|
alpar@464	1199	\ifx\first0\adn0
alpar@464	1200	\else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
alpar@464	1201	\else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
alpar@464	1202	\else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
alpar@464	1203	\else
alpar@464	1204	\ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
alpar@464	1205	\ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
alpar@464	1206	\let\next=\maketoks
alpar@464	1207	\addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
alpar@464	1208	\ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
alpar@464	1209	\fi
alpar@464	1210	\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
alpar@464	1211	\next}
alpar@464	1212	\def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
alpar@464	1213	{\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
alpar@464	1214	\def\pdflink#1{%
alpar@464	1215	\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
alpar@464	1216	\linkcolor #1\endlink}
alpar@464	1217	\def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
alpar@464	1218	\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
alpar@464	1219
alpar@464	1220
alpar@464	1221	\message{fonts,}
alpar@464	1222	% Font-change commands.
alpar@464	1223
alpar@464	1224	% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
alpar@464	1225	% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
alpar@464	1226	\newfam\sffam
alpar@464	1227	\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
alpar@464	1228	\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
alpar@464	1229
alpar@464	1230	% We don't need math for this one.
alpar@464	1231	\def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
alpar@464	1232
alpar@464	1233	% Default leading.
alpar@464	1234	\newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt
alpar@464	1235
alpar@464	1236	% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
alpar@464	1237	% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
alpar@464	1238	% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
alpar@464	1239	%
alpar@464	1240	\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
alpar@464	1241	\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
alpar@464	1242	\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
alpar@464	1243	%
alpar@464	1244	\def\setleading#1{%
alpar@464	1245	\normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
alpar@464	1246	\normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
alpar@464	1247	\normalbaselines
alpar@464	1248	\setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
alpar@464	1249	\vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
alpar@464	1250	depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
alpar@464	1251	}%
alpar@464	1252	}
alpar@464	1253
alpar@464	1254	% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
alpar@464	1255	% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
alpar@464	1256	% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
alpar@464	1257	\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
alpar@464	1258
alpar@464	1259	% Use cm as the default font prefix.
alpar@464	1260	% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
alpar@464	1261	% before you read in texinfo.tex.
alpar@464	1262	\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
alpar@464	1263	\def\fontprefix{cm}
alpar@464	1264	\fi
alpar@464	1265	% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
alpar@464	1266	\def\rmshape{r}
alpar@464	1267	\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
alpar@464	1268	\def\bfshape{b}
alpar@464	1269	\def\bxshape{bx}
alpar@464	1270	\def\ttshape{tt}
alpar@464	1271	\def\ttbshape{tt}
alpar@464	1272	\def\ttslshape{sltt}
alpar@464	1273	\def\itshape{ti}
alpar@464	1274	\def\itbshape{bxti}
alpar@464	1275	\def\slshape{sl}
alpar@464	1276	\def\slbshape{bxsl}
alpar@464	1277	\def\sfshape{ss}
alpar@464	1278	\def\sfbshape{ss}
alpar@464	1279	\def\scshape{csc}
alpar@464	1280	\def\scbshape{csc}
alpar@464	1281
alpar@464	1282	\newcount\mainmagstep
alpar@464	1283	\ifx\bigger\relax
alpar@464	1284	% not really supported.
alpar@464	1285	\mainmagstep=\magstep1
alpar@464	1286	\setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
alpar@464	1287	\setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
alpar@464	1288	\else
alpar@464	1289	\mainmagstep=\magstephalf
alpar@464	1290	\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
alpar@464	1291	\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
alpar@464	1292	\fi
alpar@464	1293	% Instead of cmb10, you may want to use cmbx10.
alpar@464	1294	% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
alpar@464	1295	% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10
alpar@464	1296	% (in Bob's opinion).
alpar@464	1297	\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
alpar@464	1298	\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
alpar@464	1299	\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
alpar@464	1300	\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
alpar@464	1301	\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
alpar@464	1302	\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
alpar@464	1303	\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
alpar@464	1304	\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
alpar@464	1305
alpar@464	1306	% A few fonts for @defun, etc.
alpar@464	1307	\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
alpar@464	1308	\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
alpar@464	1309	\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
alpar@464	1310
alpar@464	1311	% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
alpar@464	1312	\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
alpar@464	1313	\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
alpar@464	1314	\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
alpar@464	1315	\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
alpar@464	1316	\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
alpar@464	1317	\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
alpar@464	1318	\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
alpar@464	1319	\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
alpar@464	1320	\font\smalli=cmmi9
alpar@464	1321	\font\smallsy=cmsy9
alpar@464	1322
alpar@464	1323	% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
alpar@464	1324	\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
alpar@464	1325	\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
alpar@464	1326	\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
alpar@464	1327	\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}
alpar@464	1328	\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}
alpar@464	1329	\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}
alpar@464	1330	\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}
alpar@464	1331	\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}
alpar@464	1332	\font\smalleri=cmmi8
alpar@464	1333	\font\smallersy=cmsy8
alpar@464	1334
alpar@464	1335	% Fonts for title page:
alpar@464	1336	\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
alpar@464	1337	\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
alpar@464	1338	\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
alpar@464	1339	\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
alpar@464	1340	\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
alpar@464	1341	\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
alpar@464	1342	\let\titlebf=\titlerm
alpar@464	1343	\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
alpar@464	1344	\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
alpar@464	1345	\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
alpar@464	1346	\def\authorrm{\secrm}
alpar@464	1347	\def\authortt{\sectt}
alpar@464	1348
alpar@464	1349	% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
alpar@464	1350	\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
alpar@464	1351	\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
alpar@464	1352	\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
alpar@464	1353	\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
alpar@464	1354	\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
alpar@464	1355	\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
alpar@464	1356	\let\chapbf=\chaprm
alpar@464	1357	\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
alpar@464	1358	\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
alpar@464	1359	\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
alpar@464	1360
alpar@464	1361	% Section fonts (14.4pt).
alpar@464	1362	\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
alpar@464	1363	\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
alpar@464	1364	\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
alpar@464	1365	\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
alpar@464	1366	\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
alpar@464	1367	\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
alpar@464	1368	\let\secbf\secrm
alpar@464	1369	\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
alpar@464	1370	\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
alpar@464	1371	\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
alpar@464	1372
alpar@464	1373	% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
alpar@464	1374	\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
alpar@464	1375	\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
alpar@464	1376	\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
alpar@464	1377	\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
alpar@464	1378	\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
alpar@464	1379	\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
alpar@464	1380	\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
alpar@464	1381	\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
alpar@464	1382	\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
alpar@464	1383	\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
alpar@464	1384	% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
alpar@464	1385	% but that is not a standard magnification.
alpar@464	1386
alpar@464	1387	% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
alpar@464	1388	% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
alpar@464	1389	% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
alpar@464	1390	% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
alpar@464	1391	% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
alpar@464	1392	%
alpar@464	1393	\def\resetmathfonts{%
alpar@464	1394	\textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
alpar@464	1395	\textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
alpar@464	1396	\textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
alpar@464	1397	}
alpar@464	1398
alpar@464	1399	% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
alpar@464	1400	% of just \STYLE. We do this so that font changes will continue to work
alpar@464	1401	% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
alpar@464	1402	% cases, not the current font. Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
alpar@464	1403	% \tenbf}, for example. By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
alpar@464	1404	% redefine \bf itself.
alpar@464	1405	\def\textfonts{%
alpar@464	1406	\let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
alpar@464	1407	\let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
alpar@464	1408	\let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
alpar@464	1409	\resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
alpar@464	1410	\def\titlefonts{%
alpar@464	1411	\let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
alpar@464	1412	\let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
alpar@464	1413	\let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
alpar@464	1414	\let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
alpar@464	1415	\resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
alpar@464	1416	\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
alpar@464	1417	\def\chapfonts{%
alpar@464	1418	\let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
alpar@464	1419	\let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
alpar@464	1420	\let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
alpar@464	1421	\resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
alpar@464	1422	\def\secfonts{%
alpar@464	1423	\let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
alpar@464	1424	\let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
alpar@464	1425	\let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
alpar@464	1426	\resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
alpar@464	1427	\def\subsecfonts{%
alpar@464	1428	\let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
alpar@464	1429	\let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
alpar@464	1430	\let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
alpar@464	1431	\resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
alpar@464	1432	\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
alpar@464	1433	\def\smallfonts{%
alpar@464	1434	\let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
alpar@464	1435	\let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
alpar@464	1436	\let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
alpar@464	1437	\let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
alpar@464	1438	\resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
alpar@464	1439	\def\smallerfonts{%
alpar@464	1440	\let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
alpar@464	1441	\let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
alpar@464	1442	\let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
alpar@464	1443	\let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
alpar@464	1444	\resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
alpar@464	1445
alpar@464	1446	% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
alpar@464	1447	\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
alpar@464	1448
alpar@464	1449	% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
alpar@464	1450	% can fit this many characters:
alpar@464	1451	% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
alpar@464	1452	% If we use \smallerfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
alpar@464	1453	% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
alpar@464	1454	% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
alpar@464	1455	% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
alpar@464	1456	%
alpar@464	1457	% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
alpar@464	1458	% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
alpar@464	1459	%
alpar@464	1460	% I wish we used A4 paper on this side of the Atlantic.
alpar@464	1461	%
alpar@464	1462	% --karl, 24jan03.
alpar@464	1463
alpar@464	1464
alpar@464	1465	% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
alpar@464	1466	%
alpar@464	1467	\textfonts
alpar@464	1468
alpar@464	1469	% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
alpar@464	1470	\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
alpar@464	1471	\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
alpar@464	1472
alpar@464	1473	% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
alpar@464	1474	\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
alpar@464	1475
alpar@464	1476	% Fonts for short table of contents.
alpar@464	1477	\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
alpar@464	1478	\setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
alpar@464	1479	\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
alpar@464	1480	\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
alpar@464	1481
alpar@464	1482	%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
alpar@464	1483	%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
alpar@464	1484
alpar@464	1485	% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
alpar@464	1486	% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
alpar@464	1487	\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
alpar@464	1488	\ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
alpar@464	1489	\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
alpar@464	1490	\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
alpar@464	1491
alpar@464	1492	\let\i=\smartitalic
alpar@464	1493	\let\var=\smartslanted
alpar@464	1494	\let\dfn=\smartslanted
alpar@464	1495	\let\emph=\smartitalic
alpar@464	1496	\let\cite=\smartslanted
alpar@464	1497
alpar@464	1498	\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
alpar@464	1499	\let\strong=\b
alpar@464	1500
alpar@464	1501	% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
alpar@464	1502	% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
alpar@464	1503	% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
alpar@464	1504	%
alpar@464	1505	\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
alpar@464	1506	\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
alpar@464	1507
alpar@464	1508	% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
alpar@464	1509	% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
alpar@464	1510	% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
alpar@464	1511	%
alpar@464	1512	\catcode`@=11
alpar@464	1513	\def\frenchspacing{%
alpar@464	1514	\sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
alpar@464	1515	\sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
alpar@464	1516	}
alpar@464	1517	\catcode`@=\other
alpar@464	1518
alpar@464	1519	\def\t#1{%
alpar@464	1520	{\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
alpar@464	1521	\null
alpar@464	1522	}
alpar@464	1523	\let\ttfont=\t
alpar@464	1524	\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
alpar@464	1525	\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
alpar@464	1526	\font\keysy=cmsy9
alpar@464	1527	\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
alpar@464	1528	\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
alpar@464	1529	\vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
alpar@464	1530	\hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
alpar@464	1531	\kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
alpar@464	1532	\kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
alpar@464	1533	% The old definition, with no lozenge:
alpar@464	1534	%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
alpar@464	1535	\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
alpar@464	1536
alpar@464	1537	% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
alpar@464	1538	\let\file=\samp
alpar@464	1539	\let\option=\samp
alpar@464	1540
alpar@464	1541	% @code is a modification of @t,
alpar@464	1542	% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
alpar@464	1543	\def\tclose#1{%
alpar@464	1544	{%
alpar@464	1545	% Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
alpar@464	1546	\spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
alpar@464	1547	%
alpar@464	1548	% Switch to typewriter.
alpar@464	1549	\tt
alpar@464	1550	%
alpar@464	1551	% But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
alpar@464	1552	\def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
alpar@464	1553	%
alpar@464	1554	% Turn off hyphenation.
alpar@464	1555	\nohyphenation
alpar@464	1556	%
alpar@464	1557	\rawbackslash
alpar@464	1558	\frenchspacing
alpar@464	1559	#1%
alpar@464	1560	}%
alpar@464	1561	\null
alpar@464	1562	}
alpar@464	1563
alpar@464	1564	% We must turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
alpar@464	1565	% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
alpar@464	1566	% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
alpar@464	1567
alpar@464	1568	% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
alpar@464	1569	% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
alpar@464	1570	% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
alpar@464	1571	% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
alpar@464	1572	% -- rms.
alpar@464	1573	{
alpar@464	1574	\catcode`\-=\active
alpar@464	1575	\catcode`\_=\active
alpar@464	1576	%
alpar@464	1577	\global\def\code{\begingroup
alpar@464	1578	\catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
alpar@464	1579	\catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
alpar@464	1580	\codex
alpar@464	1581	}
alpar@464	1582	%
alpar@464	1583	% If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
alpar@464	1584	% just treat them as a normal -.
alpar@464	1585	\global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
alpar@464	1586	}
alpar@464	1587
alpar@464	1588	\def\realdash{-}
alpar@464	1589	\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
alpar@464	1590	\def\codeunder{%
alpar@464	1591	% this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
alpar@464	1592	% is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
alpar@464	1593	% will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
alpar@464	1594	% (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
alpar@464	1595	\ifusingtt{\ifmmode
alpar@464	1596	\mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
alpar@464	1597	\else\normalunderscore \fi
alpar@464	1598	\discretionary{}{}{}}%
alpar@464	1599	{\_}%
alpar@464	1600	}
alpar@464	1601	\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
alpar@464	1602
alpar@464	1603	% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
alpar@464	1604	% then @kbd has no effect.
alpar@464	1605
alpar@464	1606	% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
alpar@464	1607	% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
alpar@464	1608	% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
alpar@464	1609	\def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
alpar@464	1610	\def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
alpar@464	1611	\def\arg{#1}%
alpar@464	1612	\ifx\arg\worddistinct
alpar@464	1613	\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
alpar@464	1614	\else\ifx\arg\wordexample
alpar@464	1615	\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
alpar@464	1616	\else\ifx\arg\wordcode
alpar@464	1617	\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
alpar@464	1618	\else
alpar@464	1619	\errhelp = \EMsimple
alpar@464	1620	\errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\arg'}%
alpar@464	1621	\fi\fi\fi
alpar@464	1622	}
alpar@464	1623	\def\worddistinct{distinct}
alpar@464	1624	\def\wordexample{example}
alpar@464	1625	\def\wordcode{code}
alpar@464	1626
alpar@464	1627	% Default is `distinct.'
alpar@464	1628	\kbdinputstyle distinct
alpar@464	1629
alpar@464	1630	\def\xkey{\key}
alpar@464	1631	\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
alpar@464	1632	\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
alpar@464	1633	\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
alpar@464	1634	\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
alpar@464	1635
alpar@464	1636	% For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
alpar@464	1637	\let\url=\code
alpar@464	1638	\let\env=\code
alpar@464	1639	\let\command=\code
alpar@464	1640
alpar@464	1641	% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
alpar@464	1642	% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
alpar@464	1643	% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
alpar@464	1644	% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in
alpar@464	1645	% a hypertex \special here.
alpar@464	1646	%
alpar@464	1647	\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
alpar@464	1648	\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
alpar@464	1649	\unsepspaces
alpar@464	1650	\pdfurl{#1}%
alpar@464	1651	\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
alpar@464	1652	\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
alpar@464	1653	\unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
alpar@464	1654	\else
alpar@464	1655	\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
alpar@464	1656	\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
alpar@464	1657	\ifpdf
alpar@464	1658	\unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
alpar@464	1659	\else
alpar@464	1660	\unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
alpar@464	1661	\fi
alpar@464	1662	\else
alpar@464	1663	\code{#1}% only url given, so show it
alpar@464	1664	\fi
alpar@464	1665	\fi
alpar@464	1666	\endlink
alpar@464	1667	\endgroup}
alpar@464	1668
alpar@464	1669	% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
alpar@464	1670	% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
alpar@464	1671	%
alpar@464	1672	%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
alpar@464	1673	\ifpdf
alpar@464	1674	\def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
alpar@464	1675	\def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
alpar@464	1676	\unsepspaces
alpar@464	1677	\pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
alpar@464	1678	\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
alpar@464	1679	\ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
alpar@464	1680	\endlink
alpar@464	1681	\endgroup}
alpar@464	1682	\else
alpar@464	1683	\let\email=\uref
alpar@464	1684	\fi
alpar@464	1685
alpar@464	1686	% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
alpar@464	1687	% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
alpar@464	1688	% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
alpar@464	1689	% this property, we can check that font parameter.
alpar@464	1690	%
alpar@464	1691	\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
alpar@464	1692
alpar@464	1693	% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
alpar@464	1694	% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
alpar@464	1695	%
alpar@464	1696	\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
alpar@464	1697
alpar@464	1698	\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
alpar@464	1699
alpar@464	1700	% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
alpar@464	1701	% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
alpar@464	1702	% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
alpar@464	1703	%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
alpar@464	1704
alpar@464	1705	% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
alpar@464	1706	\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
alpar@464	1707	\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
alpar@464	1708	\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
alpar@464	1709
alpar@464	1710	% @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
alpar@464	1711	\def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
alpar@464	1712
alpar@464	1713	% @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
alpar@464	1714	\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
alpar@464	1715
alpar@464	1716	% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. For now, only works in text size;
alpar@464	1717	% we'd have to redo the font mechanism to change the \scriptstyle and
alpar@464	1718	% \scriptscriptstyle font sizes to make it look right in headings.
alpar@464	1719	% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
alpar@464	1720	%
alpar@464	1721	\def\registeredsymbol{%
alpar@464	1722	$^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm R$}\hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
alpar@464	1723	}$%
alpar@464	1724	}
alpar@464	1725
alpar@464	1726
alpar@464	1727	\message{page headings,}
alpar@464	1728
alpar@464	1729	\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
alpar@464	1730	\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
alpar@464	1731
alpar@464	1732	% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
alpar@464	1733	\newif\ifseenauthor
alpar@464	1734	\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
alpar@464	1735
alpar@464	1736	% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
alpar@464	1737	% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
alpar@464	1738	%
alpar@464	1739	\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
alpar@464	1740	\let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
alpar@464	1741	\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
alpar@464	1742	\let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
alpar@464	1743
alpar@464	1744	\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
alpar@464	1745	\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
alpar@464	1746	\endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
alpar@464	1747
alpar@464	1748	\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
alpar@464	1749	\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
alpar@464	1750	\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
alpar@464	1751	%
alpar@464	1752	\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines
alpar@464	1753	\let\tt=\authortt}%
alpar@464	1754	%
alpar@464	1755	% Leave some space at the very top of the page.
alpar@464	1756	\vglue\titlepagetopglue
alpar@464	1757	%
alpar@464	1758	% Now you can print the title using @title.
alpar@464	1759	\def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
alpar@464	1760	\def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
alpar@464	1761	% print a rule at the page bottom also.
alpar@464	1762	\finishedtitlepagefalse
alpar@464	1763	\vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
alpar@464	1764	% No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
alpar@464	1765	\finishedtitlepagetrue
alpar@464	1766	%
alpar@464	1767	% Now you can put text using @subtitle.
alpar@464	1768	\def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
alpar@464	1769	\def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
alpar@464	1770	%
alpar@464	1771	% @author should come last, but may come many times.
alpar@464	1772	\def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
alpar@464	1773	\def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
alpar@464	1774	{\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
alpar@464	1775	%
alpar@464	1776	% Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
alpar@464	1777	% at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
alpar@464	1778	\let\oldpage = \page
alpar@464	1779	\def\page{%
alpar@464	1780	\iffinishedtitlepage\else
alpar@464	1781	\finishtitlepage
alpar@464	1782	\fi
alpar@464	1783	\oldpage
alpar@464	1784	\let\page = \oldpage
alpar@464	1785	\hbox{}}%
alpar@464	1786	% \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
alpar@464	1787	}
alpar@464	1788
alpar@464	1789	\def\Etitlepage{%
alpar@464	1790	\iffinishedtitlepage\else
alpar@464	1791	\finishtitlepage
alpar@464	1792	\fi
alpar@464	1793	% It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
alpar@464	1794	% because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
alpar@464	1795	% If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
alpar@464	1796	% after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
alpar@464	1797	\oldpage
alpar@464	1798	\endgroup
alpar@464	1799	%
alpar@464	1800	% Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
alpar@464	1801	% in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
alpar@464	1802	\HEADINGSon
alpar@464	1803	%
alpar@464	1804	% If they want short, they certainly want long too.
alpar@464	1805	\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
alpar@464	1806	\shortcontents
alpar@464	1807	\contents
alpar@464	1808	\global\let\shortcontents = \relax
alpar@464	1809	\global\let\contents = \relax
alpar@464	1810	\fi
alpar@464	1811	%
alpar@464	1812	\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
alpar@464	1813	\contents
alpar@464	1814	\global\let\contents = \relax
alpar@464	1815	\global\let\shortcontents = \relax
alpar@464	1816	\fi
alpar@464	1817	}
alpar@464	1818
alpar@464	1819	\def\finishtitlepage{%
alpar@464	1820	\vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
alpar@464	1821	\vskip\titlepagebottomglue
alpar@464	1822	\finishedtitlepagetrue
alpar@464	1823	}
alpar@464	1824
alpar@464	1825	%%% Set up page headings and footings.
alpar@464	1826
alpar@464	1827	\let\thispage=\folio
alpar@464	1828
alpar@464	1829	\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
alpar@464	1830	\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
alpar@464	1831	\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
alpar@464	1832	\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
alpar@464	1833
alpar@464	1834	% Now make Tex use those variables
alpar@464	1835	\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
alpar@464	1836	\else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
alpar@464	1837	\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
alpar@464	1838	\else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
alpar@464	1839	\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
alpar@464	1840
alpar@464	1841	% Commands to set those variables.
alpar@464	1842	% For example, this is what @headings on does
alpar@464	1843	% @evenheading @thistitle\|@thispage\|@thischapter
alpar@464	1844	% @oddheading @thischapter\|@thispage\|@thistitle
alpar@464	1845	% @evenfooting @thisfile\|\|
alpar@464	1846	% @oddfooting \|\|@thisfile
alpar@464	1847
alpar@464	1848	\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
alpar@464	1849	\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
alpar@464	1850	\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
alpar@464	1851
alpar@464	1852	\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
alpar@464	1853	\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
alpar@464	1854	\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
alpar@464	1855
alpar@464	1856	{\catcode`\@=0 %
alpar@464	1857
alpar@464	1858	\gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@\|@\|@\|@\|\finish}
alpar@464	1859	\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@\|#2@\|#3@\|#4\finish{%
alpar@464	1860	\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
alpar@464	1861
alpar@464	1862	\gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@\|@\|@\|@\|\finish}
alpar@464	1863	\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@\|#2@\|#3@\|#4\finish{%
alpar@464	1864	\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
alpar@464	1865
alpar@464	1866	\gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
alpar@464	1867
alpar@464	1868	\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@\|@\|@\|@\|\finish}
alpar@464	1869	\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@\|#2@\|#3@\|#4\finish{%
alpar@464	1870	\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
alpar@464	1871
alpar@464	1872	\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@\|@\|@\|@\|\finish}
alpar@464	1873	\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@\|#2@\|#3@\|#4\finish{%
alpar@464	1874	\global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
alpar@464	1875	%
alpar@464	1876	% Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
alpar@464	1877	% @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
alpar@464	1878	\global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
alpar@464	1879	\global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
alpar@464	1880	}
alpar@464	1881
alpar@464	1882	\gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
alpar@464	1883	%
alpar@464	1884	}% unbind the catcode of @.
alpar@464	1885
alpar@464	1886	% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
alpar@464	1887	% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
alpar@464	1888	% @headings off turns them off.
alpar@464	1889	% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
alpar@464	1890	% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
alpar@464	1891	% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
alpar@464	1892	% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
alpar@464	1893	% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
alpar@464	1894	% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
alpar@464	1895
alpar@464	1896	\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
alpar@464	1897
alpar@464	1898	\def\HEADINGSoff{
alpar@464	1899	\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
alpar@464	1900	\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
alpar@464	1901	\HEADINGSoff
alpar@464	1902	% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
alpar@464	1903	% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
alpar@464	1904	% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
alpar@464	1905	% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
alpar@464	1906	% edge of all pages.
alpar@464	1907	\def\HEADINGSdouble{
alpar@464	1908	\global\pageno=1
alpar@464	1909	\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
alpar@464	1910	\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
alpar@464	1911	\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
alpar@464	1912	\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
alpar@464	1913	\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
alpar@464	1914	}
alpar@464	1915	\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
alpar@464	1916
alpar@464	1917	% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
alpar@464	1918	% page number on top right.
alpar@464	1919	\def\HEADINGSsingle{
alpar@464	1920	\global\pageno=1
alpar@464	1921	\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
alpar@464	1922	\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
alpar@464	1923	\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
alpar@464	1924	\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
alpar@464	1925	\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
alpar@464	1926	}
alpar@464	1927	\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
alpar@464	1928
alpar@464	1929	\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
alpar@464	1930	\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
alpar@464	1931	\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
alpar@464	1932	\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
alpar@464	1933	\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
alpar@464	1934	\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
alpar@464	1935	\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
alpar@464	1936	\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
alpar@464	1937	}
alpar@464	1938
alpar@464	1939	\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
alpar@464	1940	\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
alpar@464	1941	\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
alpar@464	1942	\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
alpar@464	1943	\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
alpar@464	1944	\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
alpar@464	1945	\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
alpar@464	1946	}
alpar@464	1947
alpar@464	1948	% Subroutines used in generating headings
alpar@464	1949	% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
alpar@464	1950	% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
alpar@464	1951	% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
alpar@464	1952	\ifx\today\undefined
alpar@464	1953	\def\today{%
alpar@464	1954	\number\day\space
alpar@464	1955	\ifcase\month
alpar@464	1956	\or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
alpar@464	1957	\or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
alpar@464	1958	\or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
alpar@464	1959	\fi
alpar@464	1960	\space\number\year}
alpar@464	1961	\fi
alpar@464	1962
alpar@464	1963	% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
alpar@464	1964	% It generates no output of its own.
alpar@464	1965	\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
alpar@464	1966	\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
alpar@464	1967	\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
alpar@464	1968
alpar@464	1969
alpar@464	1970	\message{tables,}
alpar@464	1971	% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
alpar@464	1972
alpar@464	1973	% default indentation of table text
alpar@464	1974	\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
alpar@464	1975	% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
alpar@464	1976	\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
alpar@464	1977	% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
alpar@464	1978	\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
alpar@464	1979
alpar@464	1980	% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
alpar@464	1981	\newdimen\itemmax
alpar@464	1982
alpar@464	1983	% Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
alpar@464	1984	% these defs.
alpar@464	1985	% They also define \itemindex
alpar@464	1986	% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
alpar@464	1987
alpar@464	1988	\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
alpar@464	1989
alpar@464	1990	\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
alpar@464	1991
alpar@464	1992	\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
alpar@464	1993	\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
alpar@464	1994
alpar@464	1995	\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
alpar@464	1996	\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
alpar@464	1997
alpar@464	1998	\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
alpar@464	1999	\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
alpar@464	2000
alpar@464	2001	\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
alpar@464	2002	\itemzzz {#1}}
alpar@464	2003
alpar@464	2004	\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
alpar@464	2005	\itemzzz {#1}}
alpar@464	2006
alpar@464	2007	\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
alpar@464	2008	\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
alpar@464	2009	\advance\hsize by -\tableindent
alpar@464	2010	\setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
alpar@464	2011	\itemindex{#1}%
alpar@464	2012	\nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
alpar@464	2013	%
alpar@464	2014	% If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
alpar@464	2015	% by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
alpar@464	2016	% line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
alpar@464	2017	% command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
alpar@464	2018	% horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
alpar@464	2019	\ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
alpar@464	2020	%
alpar@464	2021	% Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
alpar@464	2022	% but leave it ragged-right.
alpar@464	2023	\begingroup
alpar@464	2024	\advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
alpar@464	2025	\advance\hsize by\tableindent
alpar@464	2026	\advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
alpar@464	2027	\leavevmode\unhbox0\par
alpar@464	2028	\endgroup
alpar@464	2029	%
alpar@464	2030	% We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
alpar@464	2031	% \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
alpar@464	2032	\nobreak \vskip-\parskip
alpar@464	2033	%
alpar@464	2034	% Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. (Unfortunately
alpar@464	2035	% we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
alpar@464	2036	% \baselineskip glue.) However, if what follows is an environment
alpar@464	2037	% such as @example, there will be no \parskip glue; then
alpar@464	2038	% the negative vskip we just would cause the example and the item to
alpar@464	2039	% crash together. So we use this bizarre value of 10001 as a signal
alpar@464	2040	% to \aboveenvbreak to insert \parskip glue after all.
alpar@464	2041	% (Possibly there are other commands that could be followed by
alpar@464	2042	% @example which need the same treatment, but not section titles; or
alpar@464	2043	% maybe section titles are the only special case and they should be
alpar@464	2044	% penalty 10001...)
alpar@464	2045	\penalty 10001
alpar@464	2046	\endgroup
alpar@464	2047	\itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
alpar@464	2048	\else
alpar@464	2049	% The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
alpar@464	2050	% following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
alpar@464	2051	\noindent
alpar@464	2052	% Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
alpar@464	2053	% the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
alpar@464	2054	% eventually be printed.
alpar@464	2055	\nobreak\kern-\tableindent
alpar@464	2056	\dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
alpar@464	2057	\unhbox0
alpar@464	2058	\nobreak\kern\dimen0
alpar@464	2059	\endgroup
alpar@464	2060	\itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
alpar@464	2061	\fi
alpar@464	2062	}
alpar@464	2063
alpar@464	2064	\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
alpar@464	2065	\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
alpar@464	2066	\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
alpar@464	2067	\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
alpar@464	2068	\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
alpar@464	2069	\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
alpar@464	2070
alpar@464	2071	% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
alpar@464	2072	\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
alpar@464	2073
alpar@464	2074	% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
alpar@464	2075	\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
alpar@464	2076	{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
alpar@464	2077	\gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
alpar@464	2078	\tabley\dontindex#1 \endtabley}}
alpar@464	2079
alpar@464	2080	\def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
alpar@464	2081	{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
alpar@464	2082	\gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
alpar@464	2083	\tabley\fnitemindex#1 \endtabley
alpar@464	2084	\def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
alpar@464	2085	\let\Etable=\relax}}
alpar@464	2086
alpar@464	2087	\def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
alpar@464	2088	{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
alpar@464	2089	\gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
alpar@464	2090	\tabley\vritemindex#1 \endtabley
alpar@464	2091	\def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
alpar@464	2092	\let\Etable=\relax}}
alpar@464	2093
alpar@464	2094	\def\dontindex #1{}
alpar@464	2095	\def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
alpar@464	2096	\def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
alpar@464	2097
alpar@464	2098	{\obeyspaces %
alpar@464	2099	\gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
alpar@464	2100	\tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
alpar@464	2101
alpar@464	2102	\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
alpar@464	2103	\aboveenvbreak %
alpar@464	2104	\begingroup %
alpar@464	2105	\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
alpar@464	2106	\let\itemindex=#1%
alpar@464	2107	\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
alpar@464	2108	\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
alpar@464	2109	\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
alpar@464	2110	\def\itemfont{#2}%
alpar@464	2111	\itemmax=\tableindent %
alpar@464	2112	\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
alpar@464	2113	\advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
alpar@464	2114	\exdentamount=\tableindent
alpar@464	2115	\parindent = 0pt
alpar@464	2116	\parskip = \smallskipamount
alpar@464	2117	\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
alpar@464	2118	\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
alpar@464	2119	\let\item = \internalBitem %
alpar@464	2120	\let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
alpar@464	2121	\let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
alpar@464	2122	\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
alpar@464	2123	\let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
alpar@464	2124	\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
alpar@464	2125	}
alpar@464	2126
alpar@464	2127	% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
alpar@464	2128
alpar@464	2129	\newcount \itemno
alpar@464	2130
alpar@464	2131	\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
alpar@464	2132
alpar@464	2133	\def\itemizezzz #1{%
alpar@464	2134	\begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
alpar@464	2135	\itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
alpar@464	2136	}
alpar@464	2137
alpar@464	2138	\def\itemizey#1#2{%
alpar@464	2139	\aboveenvbreak
alpar@464	2140	\itemmax=\itemindent
alpar@464	2141	\advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
alpar@464	2142	\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
alpar@464	2143	\exdentamount=\itemindent
alpar@464	2144	\parindent=0pt
alpar@464	2145	\parskip=\smallskipamount
alpar@464	2146	\ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
alpar@464	2147	\def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
alpar@464	2148	\def\itemcontents{#1}%
alpar@464	2149	% @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
alpar@464	2150	\ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
alpar@464	2151	\let\item=\itemizeitem
alpar@464	2152	}
alpar@464	2153
alpar@464	2154	% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
alpar@464	2155	% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
alpar@464	2156	%
alpar@464	2157	\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
alpar@464	2158
alpar@464	2159	% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
alpar@464	2160	% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
alpar@464	2161	% argument is the same as `1'.
alpar@464	2162	%
alpar@464	2163	\def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
alpar@464	2164	\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
alpar@464	2165	\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
alpar@464	2166	\begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
alpar@464	2167	%
alpar@464	2168	% If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
alpar@464	2169	\def\thearg{#1}%
alpar@464	2170	\ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
alpar@464	2171	%
alpar@464	2172	% Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
alpar@464	2173	% letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
alpar@464	2174	% (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
alpar@464	2175	% This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
alpar@464	2176	% all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
alpar@464	2177	\expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
alpar@464	2178	\ifx\rest\empty
alpar@464	2179	% Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
alpar@464	2180	% A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
alpar@464	2181	% An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
alpar@464	2182	% not equal to itself.
alpar@464	2183	% Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
alpar@464	2184	%
alpar@464	2185	% We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
alpar@464	2186	% continuing to look for a <number>.
alpar@464	2187	%
alpar@464	2188	\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
alpar@464	2189	\numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
alpar@464	2190	\else
alpar@464	2191	% It's a letter.
alpar@464	2192	\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
alpar@464	2193	\lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
alpar@464	2194	\else
alpar@464	2195	\uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
alpar@464	2196	\fi
alpar@464	2197	\fi
alpar@464	2198	\else
alpar@464	2199	% Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
alpar@464	2200	\numericenumerate
alpar@464	2201	\fi
alpar@464	2202	}
alpar@464	2203
alpar@464	2204	% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
alpar@464	2205	% given in \thearg.
alpar@464	2206	%
alpar@464	2207	\def\numericenumerate{%
alpar@464	2208	\itemno = \thearg
alpar@464	2209	\startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
alpar@464	2210	}
alpar@464	2211
alpar@464	2212	% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
alpar@464	2213	\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
alpar@464	2214	\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
alpar@464	2215	\startenumeration{%
alpar@464	2216	% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
alpar@464	2217	\ifnum\itemno=0
alpar@464	2218	\errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
alpar@464	2219	alphabet}%
alpar@464	2220	\fi
alpar@464	2221	\char\lccode\itemno
alpar@464	2222	}%
alpar@464	2223	}
alpar@464	2224
alpar@464	2225	% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
alpar@464	2226	\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
alpar@464	2227	\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
alpar@464	2228	\startenumeration{%
alpar@464	2229	% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
alpar@464	2230	\ifnum\itemno=0
alpar@464	2231	\errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
alpar@464	2232	alphabet}
alpar@464	2233	\fi
alpar@464	2234	\char\uccode\itemno
alpar@464	2235	}%
alpar@464	2236	}
alpar@464	2237
alpar@464	2238	% Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
alpar@464	2239	% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
alpar@464	2240	% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
alpar@464	2241	%
alpar@464	2242	\def\startenumeration#1{%
alpar@464	2243	\advance\itemno by -1
alpar@464	2244	\itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
alpar@464	2245	}
alpar@464	2246
alpar@464	2247	% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
alpar@464	2248	% to @enumerate.
alpar@464	2249	%
alpar@464	2250	\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
alpar@464	2251	\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
alpar@464	2252	\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
alpar@464	2253	\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
alpar@464	2254
alpar@464	2255	% Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
alpar@464	2256
alpar@464	2257	\def\itemizeitem{%
alpar@464	2258	\advance\itemno by 1
alpar@464	2259	{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
alpar@464	2260	\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
alpar@464	2261	{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
alpar@464	2262	\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
alpar@464	2263	\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
alpar@464	2264	\flushcr}
alpar@464	2265
alpar@464	2266	% @multitable macros
alpar@464	2267	% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
alpar@464	2268	%
alpar@464	2269	% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
alpar@464	2270	% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
alpar@464	2271	% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
alpar@464	2272	% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
alpar@464	2273
alpar@464	2274	% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
alpar@464	2275
alpar@464	2276	% To make preamble:
alpar@464	2277	%
alpar@464	2278	% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
alpar@464	2279	% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
alpar@464	2280	% @item ...
alpar@464	2281	%
alpar@464	2282	% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
alpar@464	2283	% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
alpar@464	2284	% columns as desired.
alpar@464	2285
alpar@464	2286
alpar@464	2287	% Or use a template:
alpar@464	2288	% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
alpar@464	2289	% @item ...
alpar@464	2290	% using the widest term desired in each column.
alpar@464	2291	%
alpar@464	2292	% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
alpar@464	2293	% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
alpar@464	2294	% will parse correctly, i.e.,
alpar@464	2295	%
alpar@464	2296	% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
alpar@464	2297	% template}
alpar@464	2298	% Not:
alpar@464	2299	% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
alpar@464	2300	% {Column 3 template}
alpar@464	2301
alpar@464	2302	% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
alpar@464	2303	% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
alpar@464	2304	% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
alpar@464	2305	% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
alpar@464	2306
alpar@464	2307	% @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
alpar@464	2308	% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
alpar@464	2309
alpar@464	2310	% Sample multitable:
alpar@464	2311
alpar@464	2312	% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
alpar@464	2313	% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
alpar@464	2314	% @item
alpar@464	2315	% first col stuff
alpar@464	2316	% @tab
alpar@464	2317	% second col stuff
alpar@464	2318	% @tab
alpar@464	2319	% third col
alpar@464	2320	% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
alpar@464	2321	% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
alpar@464	2322	%
alpar@464	2323	% They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
alpar@464	2324	% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
alpar@464	2325	% @end multitable
alpar@464	2326
alpar@464	2327	% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
alpar@464	2328	% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
alpar@464	2329	% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
alpar@464	2330	% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
alpar@464	2331	% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
alpar@464	2332	% to baseline.
alpar@464	2333	% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
alpar@464	2334	%
alpar@464	2335	\newskip\multitableparskip
alpar@464	2336	\newskip\multitableparindent
alpar@464	2337	\newdimen\multitablecolspace
alpar@464	2338	\newskip\multitablelinespace
alpar@464	2339	\multitableparskip=0pt
alpar@464	2340	\multitableparindent=6pt
alpar@464	2341	\multitablecolspace=12pt
alpar@464	2342	\multitablelinespace=0pt
alpar@464	2343
alpar@464	2344	% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
alpar@464	2345	%
alpar@464	2346	\let\endsetuptable\relax
alpar@464	2347	\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
alpar@464	2348	\let\columnfractions\relax
alpar@464	2349	\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
alpar@464	2350	\newif\ifsetpercent
alpar@464	2351
alpar@464	2352	% #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
alpar@464	2353	% is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
alpar@464	2354	% just throw it away). #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
alpar@464	2355	% percent of \hsize for this column.
alpar@464	2356	\def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
alpar@464	2357	\global\advance\colcount by 1
alpar@464	2358	\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
alpar@464	2359	\setuptable
alpar@464	2360	}
alpar@464	2361
alpar@464	2362	\newcount\colcount
alpar@464	2363	\def\setuptable#1{%
alpar@464	2364	\def\firstarg{#1}%
alpar@464	2365	\ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
alpar@464	2366	\let\go = \relax
alpar@464	2367	\else
alpar@464	2368	\ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
alpar@464	2369	\global\setpercenttrue
alpar@464	2370	\else
alpar@464	2371	\ifsetpercent
alpar@464	2372	\let\go\pickupwholefraction
alpar@464	2373	\else
alpar@464	2374	\global\advance\colcount by 1
alpar@464	2375	\setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
alpar@464	2376	% separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
alpar@464	2377	\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
alpar@464	2378	\fi
alpar@464	2379	\fi
alpar@464	2380	\ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
alpar@464	2381	% Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
alpar@464	2382	% we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
alpar@464	2383	\def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
alpar@464	2384	\else
alpar@464	2385	\let\go = \setuptable
alpar@464	2386	\fi%
alpar@464	2387	\fi
alpar@464	2388	\go
alpar@464	2389	}
alpar@464	2390
alpar@464	2391	% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
alpar@464	2392	%
alpar@464	2393	\def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
alpar@464	2394	\def\dotable#1{\bgroup
alpar@464	2395	\vskip\parskip
alpar@464	2396	\let\item=\crcrwithfootnotes
alpar@464	2397	% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
alpar@464	2398	% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just & until
alpar@464	2399	% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again. --karl,
alpar@464	2400	% nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
alpar@464	2401	\let\tab=&%
alpar@464	2402	\let\startfootins=\startsavedfootnote
alpar@464	2403	\tolerance=9500
alpar@464	2404	\hbadness=9500
alpar@464	2405	\setmultitablespacing
alpar@464	2406	\parskip=\multitableparskip
alpar@464	2407	\parindent=\multitableparindent
alpar@464	2408	\overfullrule=0pt
alpar@464	2409	\global\colcount=0
alpar@464	2410	\def\Emultitable{%
alpar@464	2411	\global\setpercentfalse
alpar@464	2412	\crcrwithfootnotes\crcr
alpar@464	2413	\egroup\egroup
alpar@464	2414	}%
alpar@464	2415	%
alpar@464	2416	% To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
alpar@464	2417	\setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
alpar@464	2418	%
alpar@464	2419	% \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
alpar@464	2420	% each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
alpar@464	2421	% The table preamble
alpar@464	2422	% looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
alpar@464	2423	\everycr{\noalign{%
alpar@464	2424	%
alpar@464	2425	% \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
alpar@464	2426	% Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
alpar@464	2427	% breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the problem
alpar@464	2428	% manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
alpar@464	2429	\global\colcount=0\relax}}%
alpar@464	2430	%
alpar@464	2431	% This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
alpar@464	2432	% be used as many times as user calls for columns.
alpar@464	2433	% \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
alpar@464	2434	% continue for many paragraphs if desired.
alpar@464	2435	\halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
alpar@464	2436	\multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
alpar@464	2437	%
alpar@464	2438	% In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
alpar@464	2439	% we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
alpar@464	2440	% the first one.
alpar@464	2441	%
alpar@464	2442	% If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
alpar@464	2443	% to the width of each template entry.
alpar@464	2444	%
alpar@464	2445	% If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
alpar@464	2446	% use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
alpar@464	2447	% will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
alpar@464	2448	% left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
alpar@464	2449	%
alpar@464	2450	% Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
alpar@464	2451	\rightskip=0pt
alpar@464	2452	\ifnum\colcount=1
alpar@464	2453	% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
alpar@464	2454	\advance\hsize by\leftskip
alpar@464	2455	\else
alpar@464	2456	\ifsetpercent \else
alpar@464	2457	% If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
alpar@464	2458	% we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
alpar@464	2459	\advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
alpar@464	2460	\fi
alpar@464	2461	% In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
alpar@464	2462	\leftskip=\multitablecolspace
alpar@464	2463	\fi
alpar@464	2464	% Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
alpar@464	2465	% blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
alpar@464	2466	% box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
alpar@464	2467	% For example:
alpar@464	2468	% @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
alpar@464	2469	% @item @code{#}
alpar@464	2470	% @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
alpar@464	2471	% Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
alpar@464	2472	% characters.
alpar@464	2473	\noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
alpar@464	2474	}
alpar@464	2475
alpar@464	2476	\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
alpar@464	2477	% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
alpar@464	2478	% current baselineskip.
alpar@464	2479	\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
alpar@464	2480	\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
alpar@464	2481	\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
alpar@464	2482	%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
alpar@464	2483	%% to keep lines equally spaced
alpar@464	2484	\let\multistrut = \strut
alpar@464	2485	\else
alpar@464	2486	%% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
alpar@464	2487	\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
alpar@464	2488	width0pt\relax} \fi
alpar@464	2489	%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
alpar@464	2490	%% table. If not, do nothing.
alpar@464	2491	%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
alpar@464	2492	\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
alpar@464	2493	\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
alpar@464	2494	\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
alpar@464	2495	%% than skip between lines in the table.
alpar@464	2496	\fi%
alpar@464	2497	\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
alpar@464	2498	\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
alpar@464	2499	\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
alpar@464	2500	%% than skip between lines in the table.
alpar@464	2501	\fi}
alpar@464	2502
alpar@464	2503	% In case a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
alpar@464	2504	% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is
alpar@464	2505	% finished. Otherwise, the insertion is lost, it never migrates to the
alpar@464	2506	% main vertical list. --kasal, 22jan03.
alpar@464	2507	%
alpar@464	2508	\newbox\savedfootnotes
alpar@464	2509	%
alpar@464	2510	% \dotable \let's \startfootins to this, so that \dofootnote will call
alpar@464	2511	% it instead of starting the insertion right away.
alpar@464	2512	\def\startsavedfootnote{%
alpar@464	2513	\global\setbox\savedfootnotes = \vbox\bgroup
alpar@464	2514	\unvbox\savedfootnotes
alpar@464	2515	}
alpar@464	2516	\def\crcrwithfootnotes{%
alpar@464	2517	\crcr
alpar@464	2518	\ifvoid\savedfootnotes \else
alpar@464	2519	\noalign{\insert\footins{\box\savedfootnotes}}%
alpar@464	2520	\fi
alpar@464	2521	}
alpar@464	2522
alpar@464	2523	\message{conditionals,}
alpar@464	2524	% Prevent errors for section commands.
alpar@464	2525	% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
alpar@464	2526	\def\ignoresections{%
alpar@464	2527	\let\appendix=\relax
alpar@464	2528	\let\appendixsec=\relax
alpar@464	2529	\let\appendixsection=\relax
alpar@464	2530	\let\appendixsubsec=\relax
alpar@464	2531	\let\appendixsubsection=\relax
alpar@464	2532	\let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
alpar@464	2533	\let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
alpar@464	2534	%\let\begin=\relax
alpar@464	2535	%\let\bye=\relax
alpar@464	2536	\let\centerchap=\relax
alpar@464	2537	\let\chapter=\relax
alpar@464	2538	\let\contents=\relax
alpar@464	2539	\let\section=\relax
alpar@464	2540	\let\smallbook=\relax
alpar@464	2541	\let\subsec=\relax
alpar@464	2542	\let\subsection=\relax
alpar@464	2543	\let\subsubsec=\relax
alpar@464	2544	\let\subsubsection=\relax
alpar@464	2545	\let\titlepage=\relax
alpar@464	2546	\let\top=\relax
alpar@464	2547	\let\unnumbered=\relax
alpar@464	2548	\let\unnumberedsec=\relax
alpar@464	2549	\let\unnumberedsection=\relax
alpar@464	2550	\let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
alpar@464	2551	\let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
alpar@464	2552	\let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
alpar@464	2553	\let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
alpar@464	2554	}
alpar@464	2555
alpar@464	2556	% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
alpar@464	2557	%
alpar@464	2558	\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
alpar@464	2559	\def\documentdescriptionword{documentdescription}
alpar@464	2560	\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
alpar@464	2561	\def\html{\doignore{html}}
alpar@464	2562	\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
alpar@464	2563	\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
alpar@464	2564	\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
alpar@464	2565	\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
alpar@464	2566	\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
alpar@464	2567	\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
alpar@464	2568	\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
alpar@464	2569	\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
alpar@464	2570
alpar@464	2571	% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
alpar@464	2572	% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
alpar@464	2573	\let\dircategory = \comment
alpar@464	2574
alpar@464	2575	% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
alpar@464	2576	%
alpar@464	2577	% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
alpar@464	2578	\newcount\doignorecount \doignorecount = 0
alpar@464	2579
alpar@464	2580	\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
alpar@464	2581	% Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
alpar@464	2582	\ignoresections
alpar@464	2583	%
alpar@464	2584	% Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
alpar@464	2585	\catcode\spaceChar = 10
alpar@464	2586	%
alpar@464	2587	% Ignore braces, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
alpar@464	2588	\catcode`\{ = 9
alpar@464	2589	\catcode`\} = 9
alpar@464	2590	%
alpar@464	2591	% Count number of #1's that we've seen.
alpar@464	2592	\doignorecount = 0
alpar@464	2593	%
alpar@464	2594	% Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
alpar@464	2595	\expandafter \dodoignore \csname#1\endcsname {#1}%
alpar@464	2596	}
alpar@464	2597
alpar@464	2598	{ \catcode`@=11 % We want to use \ST@P which cannot appear in texinfo source.
alpar@464	2599	\obeylines %
alpar@464	2600	%
alpar@464	2601	\gdef\dodoignore#1#2{%
alpar@464	2602	% #1 contains, e.g., \ifinfo, a.k.a. @ifinfo.
alpar@464	2603	% #2 contains the string `ifinfo'.
alpar@464	2604	%
alpar@464	2605	% Define a command to find the next `@end #2', which must be on a line
alpar@464	2606	% by itself.
alpar@464	2607	\long\def\doignoretext##1^^M\end #2{\doignoretextyyy##1^^M#1\ST@P}%
alpar@464	2608	% And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
alpar@464	2609	% line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
alpar@464	2610	% example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
alpar@464	2611	\long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M#1##2\ST@P{\doignoreyyy{##2}\ST@P}%
alpar@464	2612	%
alpar@464	2613	% And now expand that command.
alpar@464	2614	\obeylines %
alpar@464	2615	\doignoretext ^^M%
alpar@464	2616	}%
alpar@464	2617	}
alpar@464	2618
alpar@464	2619	\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
alpar@464	2620	\def\temp{#1}%
alpar@464	2621	\ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
alpar@464	2622	\let\next\doignoretextzzz
alpar@464	2623	\else % Found a nested condition, ...
alpar@464	2624	\advance\doignorecount by 1
alpar@464	2625	\let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
alpar@464	2626	% If we're here, #1 ends with \ifinfo (for example).
alpar@464	2627	\fi
alpar@464	2628	\next #1% the token \ST@P is present just after this macro.
alpar@464	2629	}
alpar@464	2630
alpar@464	2631	% We have to swallow the remaining "\ST@P".
alpar@464	2632	%
alpar@464	2633	\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
alpar@464	2634	\ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
alpar@464	2635	\let\next\enddoignore
alpar@464	2636	\else % Still inside a nested condition.
alpar@464	2637	\advance\doignorecount by -1
alpar@464	2638	\let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
alpar@464	2639	\fi
alpar@464	2640	\next
alpar@464	2641	}
alpar@464	2642
alpar@464	2643	% Finish off ignored text.
alpar@464	2644	\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}
alpar@464	2645
alpar@464	2646
alpar@464	2647	% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
alpar@464	2648	% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
alpar@464	2649	%
alpar@464	2650	% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
alpar@464	2651	% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
alpar@464	2652	% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
alpar@464	2653	% didn't need it. Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
alpar@464	2654	% losing inside @example, for instance.
alpar@464	2655	%
alpar@464	2656	\def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
alpar@464	2657	\catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
alpar@464	2658	\parsearg\setxxx}
alpar@464	2659	\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
alpar@464	2660	\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
alpar@464	2661	\def\temp{#2}%
alpar@464	2662	\ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
alpar@464	2663	\else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
alpar@464	2664	\fi
alpar@464	2665	\endgroup
alpar@464	2666	}
alpar@464	2667	% Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
alpar@464	2668	% \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
alpar@464	2669	% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
alpar@464	2670	\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
alpar@464	2671
alpar@464	2672	% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
alpar@464	2673	%
alpar@464	2674	\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
alpar@464	2675	\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
alpar@464	2676
alpar@464	2677	% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
alpar@464	2678	{
alpar@464	2679	\catcode`\_ = \active
alpar@464	2680	%
alpar@464	2681	% We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
alpar@464	2682	% we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}. So \let any
alpar@464	2683	% such active characters to their normal equivalents.
alpar@464	2684	\gdef\value{\begingroup
alpar@464	2685	\catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
alpar@464	2686	\indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
alpar@464	2687	\valuexxx}
alpar@464	2688	}
alpar@464	2689	\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
alpar@464	2690
alpar@464	2691	% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
alpar@464	2692	% properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies). Ones
alpar@464	2693	% whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
alpar@464	2694	% about that. The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable
alpar@464	2695	% is set), since the result winds up in the index file. This means that
alpar@464	2696	% if the variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost
alpar@464	2697	% certain it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with
alpar@464	2698	% sufficient work to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of
alpar@464	2699	% complete).
alpar@464	2700	%
alpar@464	2701	\def\expandablevalue#1{%
alpar@464	2702	\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
alpar@464	2703	{[No value for ``#1'']}%
alpar@464	2704	\message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
alpar@464	2705	\else
alpar@464	2706	\csname SET#1\endcsname
alpar@464	2707	\fi
alpar@464	2708	}
alpar@464	2709
alpar@464	2710	% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
alpar@464	2711	% with @set.
alpar@464	2712	%
alpar@464	2713	\def\ifset{\parsearg\doifset}
alpar@464	2714	\def\doifset#1{%
alpar@464	2715	\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
alpar@464	2716	\let\next=\ifsetfail
alpar@464	2717	\else
alpar@464	2718	\let\next=\ifsetsucceed
alpar@464	2719	\fi
alpar@464	2720	\next
alpar@464	2721	}
alpar@464	2722	\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
alpar@464	2723	\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
alpar@464	2724	\defineunmatchedend{ifset}
alpar@464	2725
alpar@464	2726	% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
alpar@464	2727	% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
alpar@464	2728	%
alpar@464	2729	\def\ifclear{\parsearg\doifclear}
alpar@464	2730	\def\doifclear#1{%
alpar@464	2731	\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
alpar@464	2732	\let\next=\ifclearsucceed
alpar@464	2733	\else
alpar@464	2734	\let\next=\ifclearfail
alpar@464	2735	\fi
alpar@464	2736	\next
alpar@464	2737	}
alpar@464	2738	\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
alpar@464	2739	\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
alpar@464	2740	\defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
alpar@464	2741
alpar@464	2742	% @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext always succeed; we
alpar@464	2743	% read the text following, through the first @end iftex (etc.). Make
alpar@464	2744	% `@end iftex' (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
alpar@464	2745	%
alpar@464	2746	\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
alpar@464	2747	\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
alpar@464	2748	\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
alpar@464	2749	\def\ifnotplaintext{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotplaintext}}
alpar@464	2750	\defineunmatchedend{iftex}
alpar@464	2751	\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
alpar@464	2752	\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
alpar@464	2753	\defineunmatchedend{ifnotplaintext}
alpar@464	2754
alpar@464	2755	% True conditional. Since \set globally defines its variables, we can
alpar@464	2756	% just start and end a group (to keep the @end definition undefined at
alpar@464	2757	% the outer level).
alpar@464	2758	%
alpar@464	2759	\def\conditionalsucceed#1{\begingroup
alpar@464	2760	\expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\endgroup}%
alpar@464	2761	}
alpar@464	2762
alpar@464	2763	% @defininfoenclose.
alpar@464	2764	\let\definfoenclose=\comment
alpar@464	2765
alpar@464	2766
alpar@464	2767	\message{indexing,}
alpar@464	2768	% Index generation facilities
alpar@464	2769
alpar@464	2770	% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
alpar@464	2771	% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
alpar@464	2772	{\catcode`\@=11
alpar@464	2773	\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
alpar@464	2774
alpar@464	2775	% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
alpar@464	2776	% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
alpar@464	2777	% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
alpar@464	2778	% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
alpar@464	2779	% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
alpar@464	2780	% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
alpar@464	2781	% for the sake of vms.
alpar@464	2782	%
alpar@464	2783	\def\newindex#1{%
alpar@464	2784	\iflinks
alpar@464	2785	\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
alpar@464	2786	\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
alpar@464	2787	\fi
alpar@464	2788	\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
alpar@464	2789	\noexpand\doindex{#1}}
alpar@464	2790	}
alpar@464	2791
alpar@464	2792	% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
alpar@464	2793	%
alpar@464	2794	\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
alpar@464	2795
alpar@464	2796	% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
alpar@464	2797	%
alpar@464	2798	\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
alpar@464	2799	%
alpar@464	2800	\def\newcodeindex#1{%
alpar@464	2801	\iflinks
alpar@464	2802	\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
alpar@464	2803	\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
alpar@464	2804	\fi
alpar@464	2805	\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
alpar@464	2806	\noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
alpar@464	2807	}
alpar@464	2808
alpar@464	2809
alpar@464	2810	% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
alpar@464	2811	% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
alpar@464	2812	%
alpar@464	2813	% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
alpar@464	2814	% inside @code.
alpar@464	2815	%
alpar@464	2816	\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
alpar@464	2817	\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
alpar@464	2818
alpar@464	2819	% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
alpar@464	2820	% #3 the target index (bar).
alpar@464	2821	\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
alpar@464	2822	% Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
alpar@464	2823	% closing the target index.
alpar@464	2824	\expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined
alpar@464	2825	% The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
alpar@464	2826	% Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
alpar@464	2827	\expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
alpar@464	2828	\expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
alpar@464	2829	\fi
alpar@464	2830	% redefine \fooindfile:
alpar@464	2831	\expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
alpar@464	2832	\expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
alpar@464	2833	% redefine \fooindex:
alpar@464	2834	\expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
alpar@464	2835	}
alpar@464	2836
alpar@464	2837	% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
alpar@464	2838	% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
alpar@464	2839	% and it is "foo", the name of the index.
alpar@464	2840
alpar@464	2841	% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
alpar@464	2842	% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
alpar@464	2843
alpar@464	2844	% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
alpar@464	2845	% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
alpar@464	2846
alpar@464	2847	\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
alpar@464	2848	\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
alpar@464	2849
alpar@464	2850	% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
alpar@464	2851	\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
alpar@464	2852	\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
alpar@464	2853
alpar@464	2854	% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
alpar@464	2855	% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
alpar@464	2856	% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
alpar@464	2857	%
alpar@464	2858	\def\indexdummies{%
alpar@464	2859	\def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
alpar@464	2860	\def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
alpar@464	2861	% Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
alpar@464	2862	% But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
alpar@464	2863	% braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
alpar@464	2864	\let\{ = \mylbrace
alpar@464	2865	\let\} = \myrbrace
alpar@464	2866	%
alpar@464	2867	% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \realbackslash #1\space, thus
alpar@464	2868	% effectively preventing its expansion. This is used only for control
alpar@464	2869	% words, not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect
alpar@464	2870	% for control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
alpar@464	2871	% from whatever follows.
alpar@464	2872	%
alpar@464	2873	% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
alpar@464	2874	% space.
alpar@464	2875	%
alpar@464	2876	% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
alpar@464	2877	% those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
alpar@464	2878	% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
alpar@464	2879	%
alpar@464	2880	\def\definedummyword##1{%
alpar@464	2881	\expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1\space}%
alpar@464	2882	}%
alpar@464	2883	\def\definedummyletter##1{%
alpar@464	2884	\expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1}%
alpar@464	2885	}%
alpar@464	2886	%
alpar@464	2887	% Do the redefinitions.
alpar@464	2888	\commondummies
alpar@464	2889	}
alpar@464	2890
alpar@464	2891	% For the aux file, @ is the escape character. So we want to redefine
alpar@464	2892	% everything using @ instead of \realbackslash. When everything uses
alpar@464	2893	% @, this will be simpler.
alpar@464	2894	%
alpar@464	2895	\def\atdummies{%
alpar@464	2896	\def\@{@@}%
alpar@464	2897	\def\ {@ }%
alpar@464	2898	\let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
alpar@464	2899	\let\} = \rbraceatcmd
alpar@464	2900	%
alpar@464	2901	% (See comments in \indexdummies.)
alpar@464	2902	\def\definedummyword##1{%
alpar@464	2903	\expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1\space}%
alpar@464	2904	}%
alpar@464	2905	\def\definedummyletter##1{%
alpar@464	2906	\expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1}%
alpar@464	2907	}%
alpar@464	2908	%
alpar@464	2909	% Do the redefinitions.
alpar@464	2910	\commondummies
alpar@464	2911	}
alpar@464	2912
alpar@464	2913	% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. \definedummyword and
alpar@464	2914	% \definedummyletter must be defined first.
alpar@464	2915	%
alpar@464	2916	\def\commondummies{%
alpar@464	2917	%
alpar@464	2918	\normalturnoffactive
alpar@464	2919	%
alpar@464	2920	% Control letters and accents.
alpar@464	2921	\definedummyletter{_}%
alpar@464	2922	\definedummyletter{,}%
alpar@464	2923	\definedummyletter{"}%
alpar@464	2924	\definedummyletter{`}%
alpar@464	2925	\definedummyletter{'}%
alpar@464	2926	\definedummyletter{^}%
alpar@464	2927	\definedummyletter{~}%
alpar@464	2928	\definedummyletter{=}%
alpar@464	2929	\definedummyword{u}%
alpar@464	2930	\definedummyword{v}%
alpar@464	2931	\definedummyword{H}%
alpar@464	2932	\definedummyword{dotaccent}%
alpar@464	2933	\definedummyword{ringaccent}%
alpar@464	2934	\definedummyword{tieaccent}%
alpar@464	2935	\definedummyword{ubaraccent}%
alpar@464	2936	\definedummyword{udotaccent}%
alpar@464	2937	\definedummyword{dotless}%
alpar@464	2938	%
alpar@464	2939	% Other non-English letters.
alpar@464	2940	\definedummyword{AA}%
alpar@464	2941	\definedummyword{AE}%
alpar@464	2942	\definedummyword{L}%
alpar@464	2943	\definedummyword{OE}%
alpar@464	2944	\definedummyword{O}%
alpar@464	2945	\definedummyword{aa}%
alpar@464	2946	\definedummyword{ae}%
alpar@464	2947	\definedummyword{l}%
alpar@464	2948	\definedummyword{oe}%
alpar@464	2949	\definedummyword{o}%
alpar@464	2950	\definedummyword{ss}%
alpar@464	2951	%
alpar@464	2952	% Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
alpar@464	2953	\definedummyword{bf}%
alpar@464	2954	\definedummyword{gtr}%
alpar@464	2955	\definedummyword{hat}%
alpar@464	2956	\definedummyword{less}%
alpar@464	2957	\definedummyword{sf}%
alpar@464	2958	\definedummyword{sl}%
alpar@464	2959	\definedummyword{tclose}%
alpar@464	2960	\definedummyword{tt}%
alpar@464	2961	%
alpar@464	2962	% Texinfo font commands.
alpar@464	2963	\definedummyword{b}%
alpar@464	2964	\definedummyword{i}%
alpar@464	2965	\definedummyword{r}%
alpar@464	2966	\definedummyword{sc}%
alpar@464	2967	\definedummyword{t}%
alpar@464	2968	%
alpar@464	2969	\definedummyword{TeX}%
alpar@464	2970	\definedummyword{acronym}%
alpar@464	2971	\definedummyword{cite}%
alpar@464	2972	\definedummyword{code}%
alpar@464	2973	\definedummyword{command}%
alpar@464	2974	\definedummyword{dfn}%
alpar@464	2975	\definedummyword{dots}%
alpar@464	2976	\definedummyword{emph}%
alpar@464	2977	\definedummyword{env}%
alpar@464	2978	\definedummyword{file}%
alpar@464	2979	\definedummyword{kbd}%
alpar@464	2980	\definedummyword{key}%
alpar@464	2981	\definedummyword{math}%
alpar@464	2982	\definedummyword{option}%
alpar@464	2983	\definedummyword{samp}%
alpar@464	2984	\definedummyword{strong}%
alpar@464	2985	\definedummyword{uref}%
alpar@464	2986	\definedummyword{url}%
alpar@464	2987	\definedummyword{var}%
alpar@464	2988	\definedummyword{w}%
alpar@464	2989	%
alpar@464	2990	% Assorted special characters.
alpar@464	2991	\definedummyword{bullet}%
alpar@464	2992	\definedummyword{copyright}%
alpar@464	2993	\definedummyword{dots}%
alpar@464	2994	\definedummyword{enddots}%
alpar@464	2995	\definedummyword{equiv}%
alpar@464	2996	\definedummyword{error}%
alpar@464	2997	\definedummyword{expansion}%
alpar@464	2998	\definedummyword{minus}%
alpar@464	2999	\definedummyword{pounds}%
alpar@464	3000	\definedummyword{point}%
alpar@464	3001	\definedummyword{print}%
alpar@464	3002	\definedummyword{result}%
alpar@464	3003	%
alpar@464	3004	% Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
alpar@464	3005	% contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
alpar@464	3006	% (non-fully-expandable) commands.
alpar@464	3007	\let\value = \expandablevalue
alpar@464	3008	%
alpar@464	3009	% Normal spaces, not active ones.
alpar@464	3010	\unsepspaces
alpar@464	3011	%
alpar@464	3012	% No macro expansion.
alpar@464	3013	\turnoffmacros
alpar@464	3014	}
alpar@464	3015
alpar@464	3016	% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
alpar@464	3017	% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
alpar@464	3018	% expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
alpar@464	3019	{\obeyspaces
alpar@464	3020	\gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
alpar@464	3021
alpar@464	3022
alpar@464	3023	% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
alpar@464	3024	% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
alpar@464	3025	% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
alpar@464	3026	% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
alpar@464	3027	%
alpar@464	3028	\def\indexdummytex{TeX}
alpar@464	3029	\def\indexdummydots{...}
alpar@464	3030	%
alpar@464	3031	\def\indexnofonts{%
alpar@464	3032	\def\ { }%
alpar@464	3033	\def\@{@}%
alpar@464	3034	% how to handle braces?
alpar@464	3035	\def\_{\normalunderscore}%
alpar@464	3036	%
alpar@464	3037	\let\,=\asis
alpar@464	3038	\let\"=\asis
alpar@464	3039	\let\`=\asis
alpar@464	3040	\let\'=\asis
alpar@464	3041	\let\^=\asis
alpar@464	3042	\let\~=\asis
alpar@464	3043	\let\==\asis
alpar@464	3044	\let\u=\asis
alpar@464	3045	\let\v=\asis
alpar@464	3046	\let\H=\asis
alpar@464	3047	\let\dotaccent=\asis
alpar@464	3048	\let\ringaccent=\asis
alpar@464	3049	\let\tieaccent=\asis
alpar@464	3050	\let\ubaraccent=\asis
alpar@464	3051	\let\udotaccent=\asis
alpar@464	3052	\let\dotless=\asis
alpar@464	3053	%
alpar@464	3054	% Other non-English letters.
alpar@464	3055	\def\AA{AA}%
alpar@464	3056	\def\AE{AE}%
alpar@464	3057	\def\L{L}%
alpar@464	3058	\def\OE{OE}%
alpar@464	3059	\def\O{O}%
alpar@464	3060	\def\aa{aa}%
alpar@464	3061	\def\ae{ae}%
alpar@464	3062	\def\l{l}%
alpar@464	3063	\def\oe{oe}%
alpar@464	3064	\def\o{o}%
alpar@464	3065	\def\ss{ss}%
alpar@464	3066	\def\exclamdown{!}%
alpar@464	3067	\def\questiondown{?}%
alpar@464	3068	%
alpar@464	3069	% Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
alpar@464	3070	% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, \|, etc.
alpar@464	3071	% Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
alpar@464	3072	%\let\tt=\asis
alpar@464	3073	%
alpar@464	3074	% Texinfo font commands.
alpar@464	3075	\let\b=\asis
alpar@464	3076	\let\i=\asis
alpar@464	3077	\let\r=\asis
alpar@464	3078	\let\sc=\asis
alpar@464	3079	\let\t=\asis
alpar@464	3080	%
alpar@464	3081	\let\TeX=\indexdummytex
alpar@464	3082	\let\acronym=\asis
alpar@464	3083	\let\cite=\asis
alpar@464	3084	\let\code=\asis
alpar@464	3085	\let\command=\asis
alpar@464	3086	\let\dfn=\asis
alpar@464	3087	\let\dots=\indexdummydots
alpar@464	3088	\let\emph=\asis
alpar@464	3089	\let\env=\asis
alpar@464	3090	\let\file=\asis
alpar@464	3091	\let\kbd=\asis
alpar@464	3092	\let\key=\asis
alpar@464	3093	\let\math=\asis
alpar@464	3094	\let\option=\asis
alpar@464	3095	\let\samp=\asis
alpar@464	3096	\let\strong=\asis
alpar@464	3097	\let\uref=\asis
alpar@464	3098	\let\url=\asis
alpar@464	3099	\let\var=\asis
alpar@464	3100	\let\w=\asis
alpar@464	3101	}
alpar@464	3102
alpar@464	3103	\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
alpar@464	3104	\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
alpar@464	3105
alpar@464	3106	% For \ifx comparisons.
alpar@464	3107	\def\emptymacro{\empty}
alpar@464	3108
alpar@464	3109	% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
alpar@464	3110	%
alpar@464	3111	\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
alpar@464	3112
alpar@464	3113	% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
alpar@464	3114	% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
alpar@464	3115	% \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are. The main exception
alpar@464	3116	% is with defuns, which call us directly.
alpar@464	3117	%
alpar@464	3118	\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
alpar@464	3119	% Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
alpar@464	3120	\ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
alpar@464	3121	\insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
alpar@464	3122	\fi
alpar@464	3123	{%
alpar@464	3124	\count255=\lastpenalty
alpar@464	3125	{%
alpar@464	3126	\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
alpar@464	3127	\escapechar=`\\
alpar@464	3128	{%
alpar@464	3129	\let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
alpar@464	3130	\def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
alpar@464	3131	% so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
alpar@464	3132	%
alpar@464	3133	% The main index entry text.
alpar@464	3134	\toks0 = {#2}%
alpar@464	3135	%
alpar@464	3136	% If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
alpar@464	3137	\def\thirdarg{#3}%
alpar@464	3138	\ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
alpar@464	3139	% If the third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index
alpar@464	3140	% line to write.
alpar@464	3141	\toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
alpar@464	3142	\fi
alpar@464	3143	%
alpar@464	3144	% Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
alpar@464	3145	% get the string to sort by.
alpar@464	3146	{\indexnofonts
alpar@464	3147	\edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
alpar@464	3148	\xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
alpar@464	3149	}%
alpar@464	3150	%
alpar@464	3151	% Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
alpar@464	3152	% the original text, including any font commands. We write
alpar@464	3153	% three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
alpar@464	3154	% subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
alpar@464	3155	% sorted result.
alpar@464	3156	\edef\temp{%
alpar@464	3157	\write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
alpar@464	3158	\realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
alpar@464	3159	}%
alpar@464	3160	%
alpar@464	3161	% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
alpar@464	3162	% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
alpar@464	3163	% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
alpar@464	3164	% \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences
alpar@464	3165	% like this:
alpar@464	3166	% @end defun
alpar@464	3167	% @tindex whatever
alpar@464	3168	% @defun ...
alpar@464	3169	% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
alpar@464	3170	% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
alpar@464	3171	% the previous defun.
alpar@464	3172	%
alpar@464	3173	% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
alpar@464	3174	% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
alpar@464	3175	%
alpar@464	3176	% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
alpar@464	3177	%
alpar@464	3178	\iflinks
alpar@464	3179	\ifvmode
alpar@464	3180	\skip0 = \lastskip
alpar@464	3181	\ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\skip0 \fi
alpar@464	3182	\fi
alpar@464	3183	%
alpar@464	3184	\temp % do the write
alpar@464	3185	%
alpar@464	3186	\ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
alpar@464	3187	\fi
alpar@464	3188	}%
alpar@464	3189	}%
alpar@464	3190	\penalty\count255
alpar@464	3191	}%
alpar@464	3192	}
alpar@464	3193
alpar@464	3194	% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
alpar@464	3195	% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
alpar@464	3196	% or
alpar@464	3197	% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
alpar@464	3198	% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
alpar@464	3199	% containing these kinds of lines:
alpar@464	3200	% \initial {c}
alpar@464	3201	% before the first topic whose initial is c
alpar@464	3202	% \entry {topic}{pagelist}
alpar@464	3203	% for a topic that is used without subtopics
alpar@464	3204	% \primary {topic}
alpar@464	3205	% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
alpar@464	3206	% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
alpar@464	3207	% for each subtopic.
alpar@464	3208
alpar@464	3209	% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
alpar@464	3210	% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
alpar@464	3211
alpar@464	3212	\def\findex {\fnindex}
alpar@464	3213	\def\kindex {\kyindex}
alpar@464	3214	\def\cindex {\cpindex}
alpar@464	3215	\def\vindex {\vrindex}
alpar@464	3216	\def\tindex {\tpindex}
alpar@464	3217	\def\pindex {\pgindex}
alpar@464	3218
alpar@464	3219	\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
alpar@464	3220	{\obeylines %
alpar@464	3221	\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
alpar@464	3222	\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
alpar@464	3223
alpar@464	3224	% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
alpar@464	3225
alpar@464	3226	% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
alpar@464	3227	% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
alpar@464	3228	%
alpar@464	3229	\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
alpar@464	3230	\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
alpar@464	3231	\dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
alpar@464	3232	%
alpar@464	3233	\smallfonts \rm
alpar@464	3234	\tolerance = 9500
alpar@464	3235	\everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
alpar@464	3236	\indexbreaks
alpar@464	3237	%
alpar@464	3238	% See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
alpar@464	3239	% Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
alpar@464	3240	% \initial {@}
alpar@464	3241	% as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
alpar@464	3242	% (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
alpar@464	3243	\catcode`\@ = 11
alpar@464	3244	\openin 1 \jobname.#1s
alpar@464	3245	\ifeof 1
alpar@464	3246	% \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
alpar@464	3247	% and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
alpar@464	3248	% index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
alpar@464	3249	% there is some text.
alpar@464	3250	\putwordIndexNonexistent
alpar@464	3251	\else
alpar@464	3252	%
alpar@464	3253	% If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
alpar@464	3254	% false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
alpar@464	3255	% it can discover if there is anything in it.
alpar@464	3256	\read 1 to \temp
alpar@464	3257	\ifeof 1
alpar@464	3258	\putwordIndexIsEmpty
alpar@464	3259	\else
alpar@464	3260	% Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
alpar@464	3261	% character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
alpar@464	3262	% to make right now.
alpar@464	3263	\def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
alpar@464	3264	\catcode`\\ = 0
alpar@464	3265	\escapechar = `\\
alpar@464	3266	\begindoublecolumns
alpar@464	3267	\input \jobname.#1s
alpar@464	3268	\enddoublecolumns
alpar@464	3269	\fi
alpar@464	3270	\fi
alpar@464	3271	\closein 1
alpar@464	3272	\endgroup}
alpar@464	3273
alpar@464	3274	% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
alpar@464	3275	% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
alpar@464	3276
alpar@464	3277	\def\initial#1{{%
alpar@464	3278	% Some minor font changes for the special characters.
alpar@464	3279	\let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
alpar@464	3280	%
alpar@464	3281	% Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
alpar@464	3282	\removelastskip
alpar@464	3283	%
alpar@464	3284	% We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
alpar@464	3285	\penalty -300
alpar@464	3286	%
alpar@464	3287	% Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
alpar@464	3288	% baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
alpar@464	3289	% to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
alpar@464	3290	% we need before each entry, but it's better.
alpar@464	3291	%
alpar@464	3292	% No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
alpar@464	3293	\vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
alpar@464	3294	\leftline{\secbf #1}%
alpar@464	3295	\vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
alpar@464	3296	%
alpar@464	3297	% Do our best not to break after the initial.
alpar@464	3298	\nobreak
alpar@464	3299	}}
alpar@464	3300
alpar@464	3301	% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
alpar@464	3302	% flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents
alpar@464	3303	% entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
alpar@464	3304	%
alpar@464	3305	\def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
alpar@464	3306	%
alpar@464	3307	% Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
alpar@464	3308	% affect previous text.
alpar@464	3309	\par
alpar@464	3310	%
alpar@464	3311	% Do not fill out the last line with white space.
alpar@464	3312	\parfillskip = 0in
alpar@464	3313	%
alpar@464	3314	% No extra space above this paragraph.
alpar@464	3315	\parskip = 0in
alpar@464	3316	%
alpar@464	3317	% Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
alpar@464	3318	\finalhyphendemerits = 0
alpar@464	3319	%
alpar@464	3320	% \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
alpar@464	3321	% don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
alpar@464	3322	% dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
alpar@464	3323	% indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
alpar@464	3324	% lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
alpar@464	3325	%
alpar@464	3326	% \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
alpar@464	3327	% of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
alpar@464	3328	\hangindent = 2em
alpar@464	3329	%
alpar@464	3330	% When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
alpar@464	3331	% with blank space.
alpar@464	3332	\rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
alpar@464	3333	%
alpar@464	3334	% A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
alpar@464	3335	\vskip 0pt plus1pt
alpar@464	3336	%
alpar@464	3337	% Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
alpar@464	3338	% parameters we've set above will have an effect.
alpar@464	3339	\noindent
alpar@464	3340	%
alpar@464	3341	% Insert the text of the index entry. TeX will do line-breaking on it.
alpar@464	3342	#1%
alpar@464	3343	% The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
alpar@464	3344	% there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
alpar@464	3345	% cursed by a Unix daemon.
alpar@464	3346	\def\tempa{{\rm }}%
alpar@464	3347	\def\tempb{#2}%
alpar@464	3348	\edef\tempc{\tempa}%
alpar@464	3349	\edef\tempd{\tempb}%
alpar@464	3350	\ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
alpar@464	3351	%
alpar@464	3352	% If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
alpar@464	3353	% this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
alpar@464	3354	% fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
alpar@464	3355	\hfil\penalty50
alpar@464	3356	\null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
alpar@464	3357	%
alpar@464	3358	% The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
alpar@464	3359	% part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
alpar@464	3360	% \hbox ensues.
alpar@464	3361	\ifpdf
alpar@464	3362	\pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
alpar@464	3363	\else
alpar@464	3364	\ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
alpar@464	3365	\fi
alpar@464	3366	\fi%
alpar@464	3367	\par
alpar@464	3368	\endgroup}
alpar@464	3369
alpar@464	3370	% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
alpar@464	3371	\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
alpar@464	3372	\hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
alpar@464	3373
alpar@464	3374	\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
alpar@464	3375
alpar@464	3376	\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
alpar@464	3377	\def\secondary#1#2{{%
alpar@464	3378	\parfillskip=0in
alpar@464	3379	\parskip=0in
alpar@464	3380	\hangindent=1in
alpar@464	3381	\hangafter=1
alpar@464	3382	\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
alpar@464	3383	\ifpdf
alpar@464	3384	\pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
alpar@464	3385	\else
alpar@464	3386	#2
alpar@464	3387	\fi
alpar@464	3388	\par
alpar@464	3389	}}
alpar@464	3390
alpar@464	3391	% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
alpar@464	3392	% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
alpar@464	3393	% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
alpar@464	3394	\catcode`\@=11
alpar@464	3395
alpar@464	3396	\newbox\partialpage
alpar@464	3397	\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
alpar@464	3398
alpar@464	3399	\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
alpar@464	3400	% Grab any single-column material above us.
alpar@464	3401	\output = {%
alpar@464	3402	%
alpar@464	3403	% Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
alpar@464	3404	% whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
alpar@464	3405	% routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
alpar@464	3406	% essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
alpar@464	3407	% that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
alpar@464	3408	% output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
alpar@464	3409	% runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
alpar@464	3410	\ifvoid\partialpage \else
alpar@464	3411	\onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
alpar@464	3412	\fi
alpar@464	3413	%
alpar@464	3414	\global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
alpar@464	3415	% Unvbox the main output page.
alpar@464	3416	\unvbox\PAGE
alpar@464	3417	\kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
alpar@464	3418	}%
alpar@464	3419	}%
alpar@464	3420	\eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
alpar@464	3421	%
alpar@464	3422	% Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
alpar@464	3423	\output = {\doublecolumnout}%
alpar@464	3424	%
alpar@464	3425	% Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
alpar@464	3426	% routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
alpar@464	3427	% format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
alpar@464	3428	% of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
alpar@464	3429	% execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
alpar@464	3430	%
alpar@464	3431	% First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
alpar@464	3432	% the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
alpar@464	3433	% changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
alpar@464	3434	% below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
alpar@464	3435	% as it did when we hard-coded it.
alpar@464	3436	%
alpar@464	3437	% We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
alpar@464	3438	% can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
alpar@464	3439	% been clobbered.
alpar@464	3440	%
alpar@464	3441	\doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
alpar@464	3442	\advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
alpar@464	3443	\divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
alpar@464	3444	\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
alpar@464	3445	%
alpar@464	3446	% Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
alpar@464	3447	% since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
alpar@464	3448	\vsize = 2\vsize
alpar@464	3449	}
alpar@464	3450
alpar@464	3451	% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
alpar@464	3452	% the last.
alpar@464	3453	%
alpar@464	3454	\def\doublecolumnout{%
alpar@464	3455	\splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
alpar@464	3456	% Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
alpar@464	3457	% (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
alpar@464	3458	% previous page.
alpar@464	3459	\dimen@ = \vsize
alpar@464	3460	\divide\dimen@ by 2
alpar@464	3461	\advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
alpar@464	3462	%
alpar@464	3463	% box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
alpar@464	3464	\setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
alpar@464	3465	\onepageout\pagesofar
alpar@464	3466	\unvbox255
alpar@464	3467	\penalty\outputpenalty
alpar@464	3468	}
alpar@464	3469	%
alpar@464	3470	% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
alpar@464	3471	% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
alpar@464	3472	\def\pagesofar{%
alpar@464	3473	\unvbox\partialpage
alpar@464	3474	%
alpar@464	3475	\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
alpar@464	3476	\wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
alpar@464	3477	\hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
alpar@464	3478	}
alpar@464	3479	%
alpar@464	3480	% All done with double columns.
alpar@464	3481	\def\enddoublecolumns{%
alpar@464	3482	\output = {%
alpar@464	3483	% Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
alpar@464	3484	% current page, no automatic page break.
alpar@464	3485	\balancecolumns
alpar@464	3486	%
alpar@464	3487	% If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
alpar@464	3488	% though, there will be another page break right after this \output
alpar@464	3489	% invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
alpar@464	3490	% want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
alpar@464	3491	% definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
alpar@464	3492	% called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
alpar@464	3493	% the output somewhat more palatable.)
alpar@464	3494	\global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
alpar@464	3495	}%
alpar@464	3496	\eject
alpar@464	3497	\endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
alpar@464	3498	%
alpar@464	3499	% \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
alpar@464	3500	% the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
alpar@464	3501	% typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
alpar@464	3502	% \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
alpar@464	3503	\pagegoal = \vsize
alpar@464	3504	}
alpar@464	3505	%
alpar@464	3506	% Called at the end of the double column material.
alpar@464	3507	\def\balancecolumns{%
alpar@464	3508	\setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
alpar@464	3509	\dimen@ = \ht0
alpar@464	3510	\advance\dimen@ by \topskip
alpar@464	3511	\advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
alpar@464	3512	\divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
alpar@464	3513	%debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
alpar@464	3514	\splittopskip = \topskip
alpar@464	3515	% Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
alpar@464	3516	{%
alpar@464	3517	\vbadness = 10000
alpar@464	3518	\loop
alpar@464	3519	\global\setbox3 = \copy0
alpar@464	3520	\global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
alpar@464	3521	\ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
alpar@464	3522	\global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
alpar@464	3523	\repeat
alpar@464	3524	}%
alpar@464	3525	%debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
alpar@464	3526	\setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
alpar@464	3527	\setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
alpar@464	3528	%
alpar@464	3529	\pagesofar
alpar@464	3530	}
alpar@464	3531	\catcode`\@ = \other
alpar@464	3532
alpar@464	3533
alpar@464	3534	\message{sectioning,}
alpar@464	3535	% Chapters, sections, etc.
alpar@464	3536
alpar@464	3537	\newcount\chapno
alpar@464	3538	\newcount\secno \secno=0
alpar@464	3539	\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
alpar@464	3540	\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
alpar@464	3541
alpar@464	3542	% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
alpar@464	3543	\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
alpar@464	3544	% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
alpar@464	3545	% We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
alpar@464	3546	% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
alpar@464	3547	\def\appendixletter{%
alpar@464	3548	\ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
alpar@464	3549	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
alpar@464	3550	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
alpar@464	3551	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
alpar@464	3552	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
alpar@464	3553	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
alpar@464	3554	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
alpar@464	3555	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
alpar@464	3556	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
alpar@464	3557	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
alpar@464	3558	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
alpar@464	3559	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
alpar@464	3560	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
alpar@464	3561	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
alpar@464	3562	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
alpar@464	3563	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
alpar@464	3564	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
alpar@464	3565	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
alpar@464	3566	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
alpar@464	3567	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
alpar@464	3568	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
alpar@464	3569	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
alpar@464	3570	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
alpar@464	3571	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
alpar@464	3572	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
alpar@464	3573	\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
alpar@464	3574	% The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
alpar@464	3575	% expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
alpar@464	3576	% expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
alpar@464	3577	% with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
alpar@464	3578	\else\char\the\appendixno
alpar@464	3579	\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
alpar@464	3580	\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
alpar@464	3581
alpar@464	3582	% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
alpar@464	3583	% page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise.
alpar@464	3584	\def\thischapter{}
alpar@464	3585	\def\thissection{}
alpar@464	3586
alpar@464	3587	\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
alpar@464	3588	\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
alpar@464	3589
alpar@464	3590	% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
alpar@464	3591	\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
alpar@464	3592	\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
alpar@464	3593
alpar@464	3594	% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
alpar@464	3595	\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
alpar@464	3596	\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
alpar@464	3597
alpar@464	3598	% Choose a numbered-heading macro
alpar@464	3599	% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
alpar@464	3600	% #2 is text for heading
alpar@464	3601	\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
alpar@464	3602	\ifcase\absseclevel
alpar@464	3603	\chapterzzz{#2}
alpar@464	3604	\or
alpar@464	3605	\seczzz{#2}
alpar@464	3606	\or
alpar@464	3607	\numberedsubseczzz{#2}
alpar@464	3608	\or
alpar@464	3609	\numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
alpar@464	3610	\else
alpar@464	3611	\ifnum \absseclevel<0
alpar@464	3612	\chapterzzz{#2}
alpar@464	3613	\else
alpar@464	3614	\numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
alpar@464	3615	\fi
alpar@464	3616	\fi
alpar@464	3617	\suppressfirstparagraphindent
alpar@464	3618	}
alpar@464	3619
alpar@464	3620	% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
alpar@464	3621	\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
alpar@464	3622	\ifcase\absseclevel
alpar@464	3623	\appendixzzz{#2}
alpar@464	3624	\or
alpar@464	3625	\appendixsectionzzz{#2}
alpar@464	3626	\or
alpar@464	3627	\appendixsubseczzz{#2}
alpar@464	3628	\or
alpar@464	3629	\appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
alpar@464	3630	\else
alpar@464	3631	\ifnum \absseclevel<0
alpar@464	3632	\appendixzzz{#2}
alpar@464	3633	\else
alpar@464	3634	\appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
alpar@464	3635	\fi
alpar@464	3636	\fi
alpar@464	3637	\suppressfirstparagraphindent
alpar@464	3638	}
alpar@464	3639
alpar@464	3640	% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
alpar@464	3641	\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
alpar@464	3642	\ifcase\absseclevel
alpar@464	3643	\unnumberedzzz{#2}
alpar@464	3644	\or
alpar@464	3645	\unnumberedseczzz{#2}
alpar@464	3646	\or
alpar@464	3647	\unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
alpar@464	3648	\or
alpar@464	3649	\unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
alpar@464	3650	\else
alpar@464	3651	\ifnum \absseclevel<0
alpar@464	3652	\unnumberedzzz{#2}
alpar@464	3653	\else
alpar@464	3654	\unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
alpar@464	3655	\fi
alpar@464	3656	\fi
alpar@464	3657	\suppressfirstparagraphindent
alpar@464	3658	}
alpar@464	3659
alpar@464	3660	% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
alpar@464	3661	\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
alpar@464	3662	\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
alpar@464	3663	\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
alpar@464	3664	\def\chapterzzz #1{%
alpar@464	3665	\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
alpar@464	3666	\global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
alpar@464	3667	\chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
alpar@464	3668	\gdef\thissection{#1}%
alpar@464	3669	\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
alpar@464	3670	% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
alpar@464	3671	% because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
alpar@464	3672	\xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
alpar@464	3673	\writetocentry{chap}{#1}{{\the\chapno}}
alpar@464	3674	\donoderef
alpar@464	3675	\global\let\section = \numberedsec
alpar@464	3676	\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
alpar@464	3677	\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
alpar@464	3678	}
alpar@464	3679
alpar@464	3680	% we use \chapno to avoid indenting back
alpar@464	3681	\def\appendixbox#1{%
alpar@464	3682	\setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} \the\chapno}%
alpar@464	3683	\hbox to \wd0{#1\hss}}
alpar@464	3684
alpar@464	3685	\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
alpar@464	3686	\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
alpar@464	3687	\def\appendixzzz #1{%
alpar@464	3688	\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
alpar@464	3689	\global\advance \appendixno by 1
alpar@464	3690	\message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
alpar@464	3691	\chapmacro {#1}{\appendixbox{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}%
alpar@464	3692	\gdef\thissection{#1}%
alpar@464	3693	\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
alpar@464	3694	\xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
alpar@464	3695	\writetocentry{appendix}{#1}{{\appendixletter}}
alpar@464	3696	\appendixnoderef
alpar@464	3697	\global\let\section = \appendixsec
alpar@464	3698	\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
alpar@464	3699	\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
alpar@464	3700	}
alpar@464	3701
alpar@464	3702	% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
alpar@464	3703	\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
alpar@464	3704	\def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
alpar@464	3705
alpar@464	3706	% @top is like @unnumbered.
alpar@464	3707	\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
alpar@464	3708
alpar@464	3709	\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
alpar@464	3710	\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
alpar@464	3711	\def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
alpar@464	3712	\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
alpar@464	3713	%
alpar@464	3714	% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
alpar@464	3715	% argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
alpar@464	3716	% expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
alpar@464	3717	% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
alpar@464	3718	% to be executed, not expanded).
alpar@464	3719	%
alpar@464	3720	% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
alpar@464	3721	% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
alpar@464	3722	% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
alpar@464	3723	% simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
alpar@464	3724	% the toc entries.)
alpar@464	3725	\toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
alpar@464	3726	%
alpar@464	3727	\unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
alpar@464	3728	\gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
alpar@464	3729	\writetocentry{unnumbchap}{#1}{{\the\chapno}}
alpar@464	3730	\unnumbnoderef
alpar@464	3731	\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
alpar@464	3732	\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
alpar@464	3733	\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
alpar@464	3734	}
alpar@464	3735
alpar@464	3736	% Sections.
alpar@464	3737	\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
alpar@464	3738	\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
alpar@464	3739	\def\seczzz #1{%
alpar@464	3740	\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
alpar@464	3741	\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
alpar@464	3742	\writetocentry{sec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}
alpar@464	3743	\donoderef
alpar@464	3744	\nobreak
alpar@464	3745	}
alpar@464	3746
alpar@464	3747	\outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
alpar@464	3748	\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
alpar@464	3749	\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
alpar@464	3750	\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
alpar@464	3751	\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
alpar@464	3752	\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
alpar@464	3753	\writetocentry{sec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}
alpar@464	3754	\appendixnoderef
alpar@464	3755	\nobreak
alpar@464	3756	}
alpar@464	3757
alpar@464	3758	\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
alpar@464	3759	\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
alpar@464	3760	\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
alpar@464	3761	\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
alpar@464	3762	\writetocentry{unnumbsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}
alpar@464	3763	\unnumbnoderef
alpar@464	3764	\nobreak
alpar@464	3765	}
alpar@464	3766
alpar@464	3767	% Subsections.
alpar@464	3768	\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
alpar@464	3769	\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
alpar@464	3770	\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
alpar@464	3771	\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
alpar@464	3772	\subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
alpar@464	3773	\writetocentry{subsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}
alpar@464	3774	\donoderef
alpar@464	3775	\nobreak
alpar@464	3776	}
alpar@464	3777
alpar@464	3778	\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
alpar@464	3779	\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
alpar@464	3780	\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
alpar@464	3781	\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
alpar@464	3782	\subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
alpar@464	3783	\writetocentry{subsec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}
alpar@464	3784	\appendixnoderef
alpar@464	3785	\nobreak
alpar@464	3786	}
alpar@464	3787
alpar@464	3788	\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
alpar@464	3789	\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
alpar@464	3790	\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
alpar@464	3791	\plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
alpar@464	3792	\writetocentry{unnumbsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}
alpar@464	3793	\unnumbnoderef
alpar@464	3794	\nobreak
alpar@464	3795	}
alpar@464	3796
alpar@464	3797	% Subsubsections.
alpar@464	3798	\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
alpar@464	3799	\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
alpar@464	3800	\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
alpar@464	3801	\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
alpar@464	3802	\subsubsecheading {#1}
alpar@464	3803	{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
alpar@464	3804	\writetocentry{subsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}
alpar@464	3805	\donoderef
alpar@464	3806	\nobreak
alpar@464	3807	}
alpar@464	3808
alpar@464	3809	\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
alpar@464	3810	\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
alpar@464	3811	\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
alpar@464	3812	\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
alpar@464	3813	\subsubsecheading {#1}
alpar@464	3814	{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
alpar@464	3815	\writetocentry{subsubsec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}
alpar@464	3816	\appendixnoderef
alpar@464	3817	\nobreak
alpar@464	3818	}
alpar@464	3819
alpar@464	3820	\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
alpar@464	3821	\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
alpar@464	3822	\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
alpar@464	3823	\plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
alpar@464	3824	\writetocentry{unnumbsubsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}
alpar@464	3825	\unnumbnoderef
alpar@464	3826	\nobreak
alpar@464	3827	}
alpar@464	3828
alpar@464	3829	% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
alpar@464	3830	% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
alpar@464	3831	\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
alpar@464	3832	\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
alpar@464	3833	\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
alpar@464	3834	\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
alpar@464	3835	\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
alpar@464	3836
alpar@464	3837	\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
alpar@464	3838	\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
alpar@464	3839	\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
alpar@464	3840	\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
alpar@464	3841
alpar@464	3842	\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
alpar@464	3843	\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
alpar@464	3844	\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
alpar@464	3845	\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
alpar@464	3846
alpar@464	3847	% These macros control what the section commands do, according
alpar@464	3848	% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
alpar@464	3849	% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
alpar@464	3850	\global\let\section = \numberedsec
alpar@464	3851	\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
alpar@464	3852	\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
alpar@464	3853
alpar@464	3854	% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
alpar@464	3855
alpar@464	3856	% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
alpar@464	3857	% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
alpar@464	3858	% overlong headings to fold.
alpar@464	3859	% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
alpar@464	3860	% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
alpar@464	3861	% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
alpar@464	3862	% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
alpar@464	3863
alpar@464	3864
alpar@464	3865	\def\majorheading{%
alpar@464	3866	{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
alpar@464	3867	\parsearg\chapheadingzzz
alpar@464	3868	}
alpar@464	3869
alpar@464	3870	\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
alpar@464	3871	\def\chapheadingzzz #1{%
alpar@464	3872	{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
alpar@464	3873	\parindent=0pt\raggedright
alpar@464	3874	\rm #1\hfill}}%
alpar@464	3875	\bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
alpar@464	3876	\suppressfirstparagraphindent
alpar@464	3877	}
alpar@464	3878
alpar@464	3879	% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
alpar@464	3880	\def\heading{\parsearg\doheading}
alpar@464	3881	\def\subheading{\parsearg\dosubheading}
alpar@464	3882	\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\dosubsubheading}
alpar@464	3883	\def\doheading#1{\plainsecheading{#1}\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
alpar@464	3884	\def\dosubheading#1{\plainsubsecheading{#1}\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
alpar@464	3885	\def\dosubsubheading#1{\plainsubsubsecheading{#1}\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
alpar@464	3886
alpar@464	3887	% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
alpar@464	3888	% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
alpar@464	3889	% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
alpar@464	3890
alpar@464	3891	%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
alpar@464	3892	\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
alpar@464	3893
alpar@464	3894	\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
alpar@464	3895
alpar@464	3896	%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
alpar@464	3897	% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
alpar@464	3898
alpar@464	3899	\newskip\chapheadingskip
alpar@464	3900
alpar@464	3901	\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
alpar@464	3902	\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
alpar@464	3903	\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
alpar@464	3904
alpar@464	3905	\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
alpar@464	3906
alpar@464	3907	\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
alpar@464	3908	\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
alpar@464	3909	\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
alpar@464	3910	\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
alpar@464	3911
alpar@464	3912	\def\CHAPPAGon{%
alpar@464	3913	\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
alpar@464	3914	\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
alpar@464	3915	\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
alpar@464	3916	\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
alpar@464	3917
alpar@464	3918	\def\CHAPPAGodd{
alpar@464	3919	\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
alpar@464	3920	\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
alpar@464	3921	\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
alpar@464	3922	\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
alpar@464	3923
alpar@464	3924	\CHAPPAGon
alpar@464	3925
alpar@464	3926	\def\CHAPFplain{
alpar@464	3927	\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
alpar@464	3928	\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
alpar@464	3929	\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
alpar@464	3930
alpar@464	3931	% Plain chapter opening.
alpar@464	3932	% #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
alpar@464	3933	\def\chfplain#1#2{%
alpar@464	3934	\pchapsepmacro
alpar@464	3935	{%
alpar@464	3936	\chapfonts \rm
alpar@464	3937	\def\chapnum{#2}%
alpar@464	3938	\setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
alpar@464	3939	\vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
alpar@464	3940	\hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
alpar@464	3941	\unhbox0 #1\par}%
alpar@464	3942	}%
alpar@464	3943	\nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
alpar@464	3944	\nobreak
alpar@464	3945	}
alpar@464	3946
alpar@464	3947	% Plain opening for unnumbered.
alpar@464	3948	\def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
alpar@464	3949
alpar@464	3950	% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
alpar@464	3951	\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
alpar@464	3952	\def\centerchfplain#1{{%
alpar@464	3953	\def\centerparametersmaybe{%
alpar@464	3954	\advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
alpar@464	3955	\leftskip = \rightskip
alpar@464	3956	\parfillskip = 0pt
alpar@464	3957	}%
alpar@464	3958	\chfplain{#1}{}%
alpar@464	3959	}}
alpar@464	3960
alpar@464	3961	\CHAPFplain % The default
alpar@464	3962
alpar@464	3963	\def\unnchfopen #1{%
alpar@464	3964	\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
alpar@464	3965	\parindent=0pt\raggedright
alpar@464	3966	\rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
alpar@464	3967	}
alpar@464	3968
alpar@464	3969	\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
alpar@464	3970	\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
alpar@464	3971	\par\penalty 5000 %
alpar@464	3972	}
alpar@464	3973
alpar@464	3974	\def\centerchfopen #1{%
alpar@464	3975	\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
alpar@464	3976	\parindent=0pt
alpar@464	3977	\hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
alpar@464	3978	}
alpar@464	3979
alpar@464	3980	\def\CHAPFopen{
alpar@464	3981	\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
alpar@464	3982	\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
alpar@464	3983	\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
alpar@464	3984
alpar@464	3985
alpar@464	3986	% Section titles.
alpar@464	3987	\newskip\secheadingskip
alpar@464	3988	\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
alpar@464	3989	\def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
alpar@464	3990	\def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
alpar@464	3991
alpar@464	3992	% Subsection titles.
alpar@464	3993	\newskip \subsecheadingskip
alpar@464	3994	\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
alpar@464	3995	\def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
alpar@464	3996	\def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
alpar@464	3997
alpar@464	3998	% Subsubsection titles.
alpar@464	3999	\let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
alpar@464	4000	\let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
alpar@464	4001	\def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
alpar@464	4002	\def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
alpar@464	4003
alpar@464	4004
alpar@464	4005	% Print any size section title.
alpar@464	4006	%
alpar@464	4007	% #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
alpar@464	4008	% number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
alpar@464	4009	\def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
alpar@464	4010	{%
alpar@464	4011	\expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
alpar@464	4012	\csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
alpar@464	4013	}%
alpar@464	4014	{%
alpar@464	4015	% Switch to the right set of fonts.
alpar@464	4016	\csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
alpar@464	4017	%
alpar@464	4018	% Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
alpar@464	4019	\def\secnum{#2}%
alpar@464	4020	\setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
alpar@464	4021	%
alpar@464	4022	\vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
alpar@464	4023	\hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
alpar@464	4024	\unhbox0 #3}%
alpar@464	4025	}%
alpar@464	4026	% Add extra space after the heading -- either a line space or a
alpar@464	4027	% paragraph space, whichever is more. (Some people like to set
alpar@464	4028	% \parskip to large values for some reason.) Don't allow stretch, though.
alpar@464	4029	\nobreak
alpar@464	4030	\ifdim\parskip>\normalbaselineskip
alpar@464	4031	\kern\parskip
alpar@464	4032	\else
alpar@464	4033	\kern\normalbaselineskip
alpar@464	4034	\fi
alpar@464	4035	\nobreak
alpar@464	4036	}
alpar@464	4037
alpar@464	4038
alpar@464	4039	\message{toc,}
alpar@464	4040	% Table of contents.
alpar@464	4041	\newwrite\tocfile
alpar@464	4042
alpar@464	4043	% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
alpar@464	4044	% Called from @chapter, etc. We supply {\folio} at the end of the
alpar@464	4045	% argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
alpar@464	4046	%
alpar@464	4047	% Usage: \writetocentry{chap}{The Name of The Game}{{\the\chapno}}
alpar@464	4048	% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
alpar@464	4049	% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
alpar@464	4050	%
alpar@464	4051	\newif\iftocfileopened
alpar@464	4052	\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
alpar@464	4053	\iftocfileopened\else
alpar@464	4054	\immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
alpar@464	4055	\global\tocfileopenedtrue
alpar@464	4056	\fi
alpar@464	4057	%
alpar@464	4058	\iflinks
alpar@464	4059	\toks0 = {#2}%
alpar@464	4060	\edef\temp{\write\tocfile{\realbackslash #1entry{\the\toks0}#3{\folio}}}%
alpar@464	4061	\temp
alpar@464	4062	\fi
alpar@464	4063	%
alpar@464	4064	% Tell \shipout to create a page destination if we're doing pdf, which
alpar@464	4065	% will be the target of the links in the table of contents. We can't
alpar@464	4066	% just do it on every page because the title pages are numbered 1 and
alpar@464	4067	% 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first two pages
alpar@464	4068	% of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named `1', and
alpar@464	4069	% two named `2'.
alpar@464	4070	\ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
alpar@464	4071	}
alpar@464	4072
alpar@464	4073	\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
alpar@464	4074	\newcount\savepageno
alpar@464	4075	\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
alpar@464	4076
alpar@464	4077	% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
alpar@464	4078	% to \tocfile.
alpar@464	4079	%
alpar@464	4080	\def\startcontents#1{%
alpar@464	4081	% If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
alpar@464	4082	% start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
alpar@464	4083	% \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
alpar@464	4084	% From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
alpar@464	4085	\contentsalignmacro
alpar@464	4086	\immediate\closeout\tocfile
alpar@464	4087	%
alpar@464	4088	% Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
alpar@464	4089	% It is abundantly clear what they are.
alpar@464	4090	\unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
alpar@464	4091	\savepageno = \pageno
alpar@464	4092	\begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
alpar@464	4093	\catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11
alpar@464	4094	% We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
alpar@464	4095	% title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation. --karl, 9jul97.
alpar@464	4096	%\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
alpar@464	4097	\raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
alpar@464	4098	\advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
alpar@464	4099	%
alpar@464	4100	% Roman numerals for page numbers.
alpar@464	4101	\ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
alpar@464	4102	}
alpar@464	4103
alpar@464	4104
alpar@464	4105	% Normal (long) toc.
alpar@464	4106	\def\contents{%
alpar@464	4107	\startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
alpar@464	4108	\openin 1 \jobname.toc
alpar@464	4109	\ifeof 1 \else
alpar@464	4110	\closein 1
alpar@464	4111	\input \jobname.toc
alpar@464	4112	\fi
alpar@464	4113	\vfill \eject
alpar@464	4114	\contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
alpar@464	4115	\pdfmakeoutlines
alpar@464	4116	\endgroup
alpar@464	4117	\lastnegativepageno = \pageno
alpar@464	4118	\global\pageno = \savepageno
alpar@464	4119	}
alpar@464	4120
alpar@464	4121	% And just the chapters.
alpar@464	4122	\def\summarycontents{%
alpar@464	4123	\startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
alpar@464	4124	%
alpar@464	4125	\let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
alpar@464	4126	\let\appendixentry = \shortappendixentry
alpar@464	4127	\let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
alpar@464	4128	% We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
alpar@464	4129	\secfonts
alpar@464	4130	\let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
alpar@464	4131	\let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
alpar@464	4132	\rm
alpar@464	4133	\hyphenpenalty = 10000
alpar@464	4134	\advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
alpar@464	4135	\def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
alpar@464	4136	\def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
alpar@464	4137	\def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
alpar@464	4138	\let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry
alpar@464	4139	\let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry
alpar@464	4140	\let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry
alpar@464	4141	\openin 1 \jobname.toc
alpar@464	4142	\ifeof 1 \else
alpar@464	4143	\closein 1
alpar@464	4144	\input \jobname.toc
alpar@464	4145	\fi
alpar@464	4146	\vfill \eject
alpar@464	4147	\contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
alpar@464	4148	\endgroup
alpar@464	4149	\lastnegativepageno = \pageno
alpar@464	4150	\global\pageno = \savepageno
alpar@464	4151	}
alpar@464	4152	\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
alpar@464	4153
alpar@464	4154	\ifpdf
alpar@464	4155	\pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
alpar@464	4156	\fi
alpar@464	4157
alpar@464	4158	% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
alpar@464	4159	% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
alpar@464	4160	% The last argument is the page number.
alpar@464	4161	% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
alpar@464	4162
alpar@464	4163	% Chapters, in the main contents.
alpar@464	4164	\def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
alpar@464	4165	%
alpar@464	4166	% Chapters, in the short toc.
alpar@464	4167	% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
alpar@464	4168	\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
alpar@464	4169	\tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}%
alpar@464	4170	}
alpar@464	4171
alpar@464	4172	% Appendices, in the main contents.
alpar@464	4173	\def\appendixentry#1#2#3{%
alpar@464	4174	\dochapentry{\appendixbox{\putwordAppendix{} #2}\labelspace#1}{#3}}
alpar@464	4175	%
alpar@464	4176	% Appendices, in the short toc.
alpar@464	4177	\let\shortappendixentry = \shortchapentry
alpar@464	4178
alpar@464	4179	% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
alpar@464	4180	% The arg is, e.g., `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
alpar@464	4181	% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
alpar@464	4182	% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
alpar@464	4183	% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
alpar@464	4184	%
alpar@464	4185	\newdimen\shortappendixwidth
alpar@464	4186	%
alpar@464	4187	\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
alpar@464	4188	% This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
alpar@464	4189	% widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
alpar@464	4190	% But use \hss just in case.
alpar@464	4191	% (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
alpar@464	4192	% the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
alpar@464	4193	\dimen0 = 1em
alpar@464	4194	\hbox to \dimen0{#1\hss}%
alpar@464	4195	}
alpar@464	4196
alpar@464	4197	% Unnumbered chapters.
alpar@464	4198	\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#1}{#3}}
alpar@464	4199	\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2#3{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}}
alpar@464	4200
alpar@464	4201	% Sections.
alpar@464	4202	\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
alpar@464	4203	\def\unnumbsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
alpar@464	4204
alpar@464	4205	% Subsections.
alpar@464	4206	\def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
alpar@464	4207	\def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#5}}
alpar@464	4208
alpar@464	4209	% And subsubsections.
alpar@464	4210	\def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
alpar@464	4211	\dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
alpar@464	4212	\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#6}}
alpar@464	4213
alpar@464	4214	% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
alpar@464	4215	\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
alpar@464	4216
alpar@464	4217	% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
alpar@464	4218	% page number.
alpar@464	4219	%
alpar@464	4220	% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
alpar@464	4221	% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
alpar@464	4222	\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
alpar@464	4223	\penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
alpar@464	4224	\begingroup
alpar@464	4225	\chapentryfonts
alpar@464	4226	\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
alpar@464	4227	\endgroup
alpar@464	4228	\nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
alpar@464	4229	}
alpar@464	4230
alpar@464	4231	\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
alpar@464	4232	\secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
alpar@464	4233	\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
alpar@464	4234	\endgroup}
alpar@464	4235
alpar@464	4236	\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
alpar@464	4237	\subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
alpar@464	4238	\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
alpar@464	4239	\endgroup}
alpar@464	4240
alpar@464	4241	\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
alpar@464	4242	\subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
alpar@464	4243	\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
alpar@464	4244	\endgroup}
alpar@464	4245
alpar@464	4246	% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
alpar@464	4247	% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We
alpar@464	4248	% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
alpar@464	4249	% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
alpar@464	4250	\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
alpar@464	4251	\vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
alpar@464	4252	% Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments. Since the toc is
alpar@464	4253	% typeset in cmr, characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
alpar@464	4254	% have to do the usual translation tricks.
alpar@464	4255	\entry{#1}{#2}%
alpar@464	4256	\endgroup}
alpar@464	4257
alpar@464	4258	% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
alpar@464	4259	\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
alpar@464	4260
alpar@464	4261	\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
alpar@464	4262	\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
alpar@464	4263
alpar@464	4264	\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
alpar@464	4265	\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
alpar@464	4266	\let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
alpar@464	4267	\let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
alpar@464	4268
alpar@464	4269
alpar@464	4270	\message{environments,}
alpar@464	4271	% @foo ... @end foo.
alpar@464	4272
alpar@464	4273	% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
alpar@464	4274	%
alpar@464	4275	% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
alpar@464	4276	% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
alpar@464	4277	%
alpar@464	4278	\def\point{$\star$}
alpar@464	4279	\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
alpar@464	4280	\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
alpar@464	4281	\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
alpar@464	4282	\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
alpar@464	4283
alpar@464	4284	% The @error{} command.
alpar@464	4285	% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
alpar@464	4286	%
alpar@464	4287	\newbox\errorbox
alpar@464	4288	%
alpar@464	4289	{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
alpar@464	4290	\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
alpar@464	4291	% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
alpar@464	4292	\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
alpar@464	4293	%
alpar@464	4294	\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
alpar@464	4295	\hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
alpar@464	4296	\advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
alpar@464	4297	\vbox{
alpar@464	4298	\hrule height\dimen2
alpar@464	4299	\hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
alpar@464	4300	\vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
alpar@464	4301	\kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
alpar@464	4302	\hrule height\dimen2}
alpar@464	4303	\hfil}
alpar@464	4304	%
alpar@464	4305	\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
alpar@464	4306
alpar@464	4307	% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
alpar@464	4308	% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
alpar@464	4309	% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
alpar@464	4310
alpar@464	4311	\def\tex{\begingroup
alpar@464	4312	\catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
alpar@464	4313	\catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
alpar@464	4314	\catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
alpar@464	4315	\catcode `\%=14
alpar@464	4316	\catcode `\+=\other
alpar@464	4317	\catcode `\"=\other
alpar@464	4318	\catcode `\==\other
alpar@464	4319	\catcode `\\|=\other
alpar@464	4320	\catcode `\<=\other
alpar@464	4321	\catcode `\>=\other
alpar@464	4322	\escapechar=`\\
alpar@464	4323	%
alpar@464	4324	\let\b=\ptexb
alpar@464	4325	\let\bullet=\ptexbullet
alpar@464	4326	\let\c=\ptexc
alpar@464	4327	\let\,=\ptexcomma
alpar@464	4328	\let\.=\ptexdot
alpar@464	4329	\let\dots=\ptexdots
alpar@464	4330	\let\equiv=\ptexequiv
alpar@464	4331	\let\!=\ptexexclam
alpar@464	4332	\let\i=\ptexi
alpar@464	4333	\let\indent=\ptexindent
alpar@464	4334	\let\{=\ptexlbrace
alpar@464	4335	\let\+=\tabalign
alpar@464	4336	\let\}=\ptexrbrace
alpar@464	4337	\let\/=\ptexslash
alpar@464	4338	\let\*=\ptexstar
alpar@464	4339	\let\t=\ptext
alpar@464	4340	%
alpar@464	4341	\def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
alpar@464	4342	\def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
alpar@464	4343	\def\@{@}%
alpar@464	4344	\let\Etex=\endgroup}
alpar@464	4345
alpar@464	4346	% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
alpar@464	4347	% @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
alpar@464	4348	% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
alpar@464	4349
alpar@464	4350	% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
alpar@464	4351	\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
alpar@464	4352
alpar@464	4353	% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
alpar@464	4354	% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
alpar@464	4355	% have any width.
alpar@464	4356	\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
alpar@464	4357
alpar@464	4358	% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
alpar@464	4359	% space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
alpar@464	4360	% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
alpar@464	4361	% should produce a line of output anyway.
alpar@464	4362	%
alpar@464	4363	{\obeyspaces %
alpar@464	4364	\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
alpar@464	4365
alpar@464	4366	% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is. This is
alpar@464	4367	% for use in \parsearg.
alpar@464	4368	{\sepspaces%
alpar@464	4369	\global\let\obeyedspace= }
alpar@464	4370
alpar@464	4371	% This space is always present above and below environments.
alpar@464	4372	\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
alpar@464	4373
alpar@464	4374	% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
alpar@464	4375	% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
alpar@464	4376	% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
alpar@464	4377	% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
alpar@464	4378	%
alpar@464	4379	\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
alpar@464	4380	% =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz, q.v.
alpar@464	4381	\ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
alpar@464	4382	\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
alpar@464	4383	\endgraf
alpar@464	4384	\ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
alpar@464	4385	\removelastskip
alpar@464	4386	% it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
alpar@464	4387	% or better ...
alpar@464	4388	\ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \else \penalty-50 \fi
alpar@464	4389	\vskip\envskipamount
alpar@464	4390	\fi
alpar@464	4391	\fi
alpar@464	4392	}}
alpar@464	4393
alpar@464	4394	\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
alpar@464	4395
alpar@464	4396	% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
alpar@464	4397	\let\nonarrowing=\relax
alpar@464	4398
alpar@464	4399	% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
alpar@464	4400	% environment contents.
alpar@464	4401	\font\circle=lcircle10
alpar@464	4402	\newdimen\circthick
alpar@464	4403	\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
alpar@464	4404	\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
alpar@464	4405	\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
alpar@464	4406	%
alpar@464	4407	\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
alpar@464	4408	\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
alpar@464	4409	\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
alpar@464	4410	\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
alpar@464	4411	\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
alpar@464	4412	\ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
alpar@464	4413	\hskip\rskip}}
alpar@464	4414	\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
alpar@464	4415	\cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
alpar@464	4416	\hskip\rskip}}
alpar@464	4417	%
alpar@464	4418	\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
alpar@464	4419
alpar@464	4420	\def\cartouche{%
alpar@464	4421	\par % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
alpar@464	4422	\begingroup
alpar@464	4423	\lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
alpar@464	4424	\leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these outside.
alpar@464	4425	\cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
alpar@464	4426	\advance\cartinner by-\rskip
alpar@464	4427	\cartouter=\hsize
alpar@464	4428	\advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
alpar@464	4429	% side, and for 6pt waste from
alpar@464	4430	% each corner char, and rule thickness
alpar@464	4431	\normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
alpar@464	4432	% Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
alpar@464	4433	\let\nonarrowing=\comment
alpar@464	4434	\vbox\bgroup
alpar@464	4435	\baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
alpar@464	4436	\carttop
alpar@464	4437	\hbox\bgroup
alpar@464	4438	\hskip\lskip
alpar@464	4439	\vrule\kern3pt
alpar@464	4440	\vbox\bgroup
alpar@464	4441	\hsize=\cartinner
alpar@464	4442	\kern3pt
alpar@464	4443	\begingroup
alpar@464	4444	\baselineskip=\normbskip
alpar@464	4445	\lineskip=\normlskip
alpar@464	4446	\parskip=\normpskip
alpar@464	4447	\vskip -\parskip
alpar@464	4448	\def\Ecartouche{%
alpar@464	4449	\endgroup
alpar@464	4450	\kern3pt
alpar@464	4451	\egroup
alpar@464	4452	\kern3pt\vrule
alpar@464	4453	\hskip\rskip
alpar@464	4454	\egroup
alpar@464	4455	\cartbot
alpar@464	4456	\egroup
alpar@464	4457	\endgroup
alpar@464	4458	}}
alpar@464	4459
alpar@464	4460
alpar@464	4461	% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
alpar@464	4462	% inside a group.
alpar@464	4463	\def\nonfillstart{%
alpar@464	4464	\aboveenvbreak
alpar@464	4465	\inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
alpar@464	4466	\hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
alpar@464	4467	\sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
alpar@464	4468	\let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
alpar@464	4469	\obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
alpar@464	4470	\parskip = 0pt
alpar@464	4471	\parindent = 0pt
alpar@464	4472	\emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
alpar@464	4473	% @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
alpar@464	4474	% at next level down.
alpar@464	4475	\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
alpar@464	4476	\advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
alpar@464	4477	\exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
alpar@464	4478	\let\exdent=\nofillexdent
alpar@464	4479	\let\nonarrowing=\relax
alpar@464	4480	\fi
alpar@464	4481	}
alpar@464	4482
alpar@464	4483	% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
alpar@464	4484	% environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
alpar@464	4485	%
alpar@464	4486	% To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
alpar@464	4487	% \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we keep
alpar@464	4488	% the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
alpar@464	4489	% inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
alpar@464	4490	% the environment.
alpar@464	4491	%
alpar@464	4492	\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
alpar@464	4493
alpar@464	4494	% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
alpar@464	4495	\def\lisp{\begingroup
alpar@464	4496	\nonfillstart
alpar@464	4497	\let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
alpar@464	4498	\tt
alpar@464	4499	\let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
alpar@464	4500	\gobble % eat return
alpar@464	4501	}
alpar@464	4502
alpar@464	4503	% @example: Same as @lisp.
alpar@464	4504	\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
alpar@464	4505
alpar@464	4506	% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
alpar@464	4507	% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
alpar@464	4508	\def\smalllisp{\begingroup
alpar@464	4509	\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
alpar@464	4510	\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
alpar@464	4511	\smallexamplefonts
alpar@464	4512	\lisp
alpar@464	4513	}
alpar@464	4514	\let\smallexample = \smalllisp
alpar@464	4515
alpar@464	4516
alpar@464	4517	% @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
alpar@464	4518	%
alpar@464	4519	\def\display{\begingroup
alpar@464	4520	\nonfillstart
alpar@464	4521	\let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
alpar@464	4522	\gobble
alpar@464	4523	}
alpar@464	4524	%
alpar@464	4525	% @smalldisplay: @display plus smaller fonts.
alpar@464	4526	%
alpar@464	4527	\def\smalldisplay{\begingroup
alpar@464	4528	\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
alpar@464	4529	\smallexamplefonts \rm
alpar@464	4530	\display
alpar@464	4531	}
alpar@464	4532
alpar@464	4533	% @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
alpar@464	4534	%
alpar@464	4535	\def\format{\begingroup
alpar@464	4536	\let\nonarrowing = t
alpar@464	4537	\nonfillstart
alpar@464	4538	\let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
alpar@464	4539	\gobble
alpar@464	4540	}
alpar@464	4541	%
alpar@464	4542	% @smallformat: @format plus smaller fonts.
alpar@464	4543	%
alpar@464	4544	\def\smallformat{\begingroup
alpar@464	4545	\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
alpar@464	4546	\smallexamplefonts \rm
alpar@464	4547	\format
alpar@464	4548	}
alpar@464	4549
alpar@464	4550	% @flushleft (same as @format).
alpar@464	4551	%
alpar@464	4552	\def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
alpar@464	4553
alpar@464	4554	% @flushright.
alpar@464	4555	%
alpar@464	4556	\def\flushright{\begingroup
alpar@464	4557	\let\nonarrowing = t
alpar@464	4558	\nonfillstart
alpar@464	4559	\let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
alpar@464	4560	\advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
alpar@464	4561	\gobble
alpar@464	4562	}
alpar@464	4563
alpar@464	4564
alpar@464	4565	% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
alpar@464	4566	% and narrows the margins.
alpar@464	4567	%
alpar@464	4568	\def\quotation{%
alpar@464	4569	\begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
alpar@464	4570	{\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
alpar@464	4571	\parindent=0pt
alpar@464	4572	% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
alpar@464	4573	% doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
alpar@464	4574	\def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
alpar@464	4575	%
alpar@464	4576	% @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
alpar@464	4577	\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
alpar@464	4578	\advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
alpar@464	4579	\advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
alpar@464	4580	\exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
alpar@464	4581	\let\nonarrowing = \relax
alpar@464	4582	\fi
alpar@464	4583	}
alpar@464	4584
alpar@464	4585
alpar@464	4586	% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
alpar@464	4587	% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
alpar@464	4588	% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
alpar@464	4589	% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
alpar@464	4590	%
alpar@464	4591	% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
alpar@464	4592	%
alpar@464	4593	% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
alpar@464	4594	% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
alpar@464	4595	% verbatim line.
alpar@464	4596	\def\dospecials{%
alpar@464	4597	\do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
alpar@464	4598	\do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
alpar@464	4599	\do\<\do\>\do\\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
alpar@464	4600	}
alpar@464	4601	%
alpar@464	4602	% [Knuth] p. 380
alpar@464	4603	\def\uncatcodespecials{%
alpar@464	4604	\def\do##1{\catcode`##1=12}\dospecials}
alpar@464	4605	%
alpar@464	4606	% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
alpar@464	4607	% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
alpar@464	4608	\begingroup
alpar@464	4609	\catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
alpar@464	4610	\endgroup
alpar@464	4611	%
alpar@464	4612	% Setup for the @verb command.
alpar@464	4613	%
alpar@464	4614	% Eight spaces for a tab
alpar@464	4615	\begingroup
alpar@464	4616	\catcode`\^^I=\active
alpar@464	4617	\gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
alpar@464	4618	\endgroup
alpar@464	4619	%
alpar@464	4620	\def\setupverb{%
alpar@464	4621	\tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
alpar@464	4622	\def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
alpar@464	4623	\catcode`\`=\active
alpar@464	4624	\tabeightspaces
alpar@464	4625	% Respect line breaks,
alpar@464	4626	% print special symbols as themselves, and
alpar@464	4627	% make each space count
alpar@464	4628	% must do in this order:
alpar@464	4629	\obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
alpar@464	4630	}
alpar@464	4631
alpar@464	4632	% Setup for the @verbatim environment
alpar@464	4633	%
alpar@464	4634	% Real tab expansion
alpar@464	4635	\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
alpar@464	4636	%
alpar@464	4637	\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
alpar@464	4638	\begingroup
alpar@464	4639	\catcode`\^^I=\active
alpar@464	4640	\gdef\tabexpand{%
alpar@464	4641	\catcode`\^^I=\active
alpar@464	4642	\def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
alpar@464	4643	\dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
alpar@464	4644	\divide\dimen0 by\tabw
alpar@464	4645	\multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
alpar@464	4646	\advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
alpar@464	4647	\wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
alpar@464	4648	}%
alpar@464	4649	}
alpar@464	4650	\endgroup
alpar@464	4651	\def\setupverbatim{%
alpar@464	4652	% Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
alpar@464	4653	\tt
alpar@464	4654	\def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
alpar@464	4655	\catcode`\`=\active
alpar@464	4656	\tabexpand
alpar@464	4657	% Respect line breaks,
alpar@464	4658	% print special symbols as themselves, and
alpar@464	4659	% make each space count
alpar@464	4660	% must do in this order:
alpar@464	4661	\obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
alpar@464	4662	\everypar{\starttabbox}%
alpar@464	4663	}
alpar@464	4664
alpar@464	4665	% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
alpar@464	4666	% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
alpar@464	4667	% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
alpar@464	4668	%
alpar@464	4669	% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
alpar@464	4670	%
alpar@464	4671	% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
alpar@464	4672	\begingroup
alpar@464	4673	\catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12
alpar@464	4674	\gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
alpar@464	4675	\endgroup
alpar@464	4676	%
alpar@464	4677	\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
alpar@464	4678	%
alpar@464	4679	%
alpar@464	4680	% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
alpar@464	4681	% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
alpar@464	4682	%
alpar@464	4683	% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
alpar@464	4684	%
alpar@464	4685	% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
alpar@464	4686	% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
alpar@464	4687	% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
alpar@464	4688	%
alpar@464	4689	% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
alpar@464	4690	%% Include LaTeX hack for completeness -- never know
alpar@464	4691	%% \begingroup
alpar@464	4692	%% \catcode`\|=0 \catcode`[=1
alpar@464	4693	%% \catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12\catcode`\ =\active
alpar@464	4694	%% \catcode`\\=12\|gdef\|doverbatim#1@end verbatim[
alpar@464	4695	%% #1\|endgroup\|def\|Everbatim[]\|end[verbatim]]
alpar@464	4696	%% \|endgroup
alpar@464	4697	%
alpar@464	4698	\begingroup
alpar@464	4699	\catcode`\ =\active
alpar@464	4700	\obeylines %
alpar@464	4701	% ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
alpar@464	4702	% of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
alpar@464	4703	% line in the output.
alpar@464	4704	\gdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\end{verbatim}}%
alpar@464	4705	\endgroup
alpar@464	4706	%
alpar@464	4707	\def\verbatim{%
alpar@464	4708	\def\Everbatim{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
alpar@464	4709	\begingroup
alpar@464	4710	\nonfillstart
alpar@464	4711	\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
alpar@464	4712	\begingroup\setupverbatim\doverbatim
alpar@464	4713	}
alpar@464	4714
alpar@464	4715	% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
alpar@464	4716	%
alpar@464	4717	% Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
alpar@464	4718	\def\verbatiminclude{%
alpar@464	4719	\begingroup
alpar@464	4720	\catcode`\\=\other
alpar@464	4721	\catcode`~=\other
alpar@464	4722	\catcode`^=\other
alpar@464	4723	\catcode`_=\other
alpar@464	4724	\catcode`\|=\other
alpar@464	4725	\catcode`<=\other
alpar@464	4726	\catcode`>=\other
alpar@464	4727	\catcode`+=\other
alpar@464	4728	\parsearg\doverbatiminclude
alpar@464	4729	}
alpar@464	4730	\def\setupverbatiminclude{%
alpar@464	4731	\begingroup
alpar@464	4732	\nonfillstart
alpar@464	4733	\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
alpar@464	4734	\begingroup\setupverbatim
alpar@464	4735	}
alpar@464	4736	%
alpar@464	4737	\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
alpar@464	4738	% Restore active chars for included file.
alpar@464	4739	\endgroup
alpar@464	4740	\begingroup
alpar@464	4741	\let\value=\expandablevalue
alpar@464	4742	\def\thisfile{#1}%
alpar@464	4743	\expandafter\expandafter\setupverbatiminclude\input\thisfile
alpar@464	4744	\endgroup
alpar@464	4745	\nonfillfinish
alpar@464	4746	\endgroup
alpar@464	4747	}
alpar@464	4748
alpar@464	4749	% @copying ... @end copying.
alpar@464	4750	% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. Many commands won't be
alpar@464	4751	% allowed in this context, but that's ok.
alpar@464	4752	%
alpar@464	4753	% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
alpar@464	4754	% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
alpar@464	4755	% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
alpar@464	4756	% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
alpar@464	4757	% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
alpar@464	4758	% possible is very desirable.
alpar@464	4759	%
alpar@464	4760	\def\copying{\begingroup
alpar@464	4761	% Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end copying'.
alpar@464	4762	% \ is the escape char in this texinfo.tex file, so it is the
alpar@464	4763	% delimiter for the command; @ will be the escape char when we read
alpar@464	4764	% it, but that doesn't matter.
alpar@464	4765	\long\def\docopying##1\end copying{\gdef\copyingtext{##1}\enddocopying}%
alpar@464	4766	%
alpar@464	4767	% We must preserve ^^M's in the input file; see \insertcopying below.
alpar@464	4768	\catcode`\^^M = \active
alpar@464	4769	\docopying
alpar@464	4770	}
alpar@464	4771
alpar@464	4772	% What we do to finish off the copying text.
alpar@464	4773	%
alpar@464	4774	\def\enddocopying{\endgroup\ignorespaces}
alpar@464	4775
alpar@464	4776	% @insertcopying. Here we must play games with ^^M's. On the one hand,
alpar@464	4777	% we need them to delimit commands such as `@end quotation', so they
alpar@464	4778	% must be active. On the other hand, we certainly don't want every
alpar@464	4779	% end-of-line to be a \par, as would happen with the normal active
alpar@464	4780	% definition of ^^M. On the third hand, two ^^M's in a row should still
alpar@464	4781	% generate a \par.
alpar@464	4782	%
alpar@464	4783	% Our approach is to make ^^M insert a space and a penalty1 normally;
alpar@464	4784	% then it can also check if \lastpenalty=1. If it does, then manually
alpar@464	4785	% do \par.
alpar@464	4786	%
alpar@464	4787	% This messes up the normal definitions of @c[omment], so we redefine
alpar@464	4788	% it. Similarly for @ignore. (These commands are used in the gcc
alpar@464	4789	% manual for man page generation.)
alpar@464	4790	%
alpar@464	4791	% Seems pretty fragile, most line-oriented commands will presumably
alpar@464	4792	% fail, but for the limited use of getting the copying text (which
alpar@464	4793	% should be quite simple) inserted, we can hope it's ok.
alpar@464	4794	%
alpar@464	4795	{\catcode`\^^M=\active %
alpar@464	4796	\gdef\insertcopying{\begingroup %
alpar@464	4797	\parindent = 0pt % looks wrong on title page
alpar@464	4798	\def^^M{%
alpar@464	4799	\ifnum \lastpenalty=1 %
alpar@464	4800	\par %
alpar@464	4801	\else %
alpar@464	4802	\space \penalty 1 %
alpar@464	4803	\fi %
alpar@464	4804	}%
alpar@464	4805	%
alpar@464	4806	% Fix @c[omment] for catcode 13 ^^M's.
alpar@464	4807	\def\c##1^^M{\ignorespaces}%
alpar@464	4808	\let\comment = \c %
alpar@464	4809	%
alpar@464	4810	% Don't bother jumping through all the hoops that \doignore does, it
alpar@464	4811	% would be very hard since the catcodes are already set.
alpar@464	4812	\long\def\ignore##1\end ignore{\ignorespaces}%
alpar@464	4813	%
alpar@464	4814	\copyingtext %
alpar@464	4815	\endgroup}%
alpar@464	4816	}
alpar@464	4817
alpar@464	4818	\message{defuns,}
alpar@464	4819	% @defun etc.
alpar@464	4820
alpar@464	4821	% Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
alpar@464	4822	\def\setdeffont#1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
alpar@464	4823
alpar@464	4824	\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
alpar@464	4825	\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
alpar@464	4826	\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
alpar@464	4827
alpar@464	4828	\newcount\parencount
alpar@464	4829
alpar@464	4830	% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
alpar@464	4831	%
alpar@464	4832	\def\activeparens{%
alpar@464	4833	\catcode`$=\active \catcode`$=\active
alpar@464	4834	\catcode`\&=\active
alpar@464	4835	\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
alpar@464	4836	}
alpar@464	4837
alpar@464	4838	% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
alpar@464	4839	\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
alpar@464	4840
alpar@464	4841	{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
alpar@464	4842
alpar@464	4843	% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
alpar@464	4844	% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
alpar@464	4845	% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
alpar@464	4846	\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
alpar@464	4847	\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
alpar@464	4848
alpar@464	4849	\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
alpar@464	4850	\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
alpar@464	4851	% This is used to turn on special parens
alpar@464	4852	% but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
alpar@464	4853	\gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
alpar@464	4854
alpar@464	4855	% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
alpar@464	4856	% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
alpar@464	4857	\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
alpar@464	4858	\global\advance\parencount by 1
alpar@464	4859	}
alpar@464	4860	%
alpar@464	4861	% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
alpar@464	4862	\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
alpar@464	4863	%
alpar@464	4864	\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
alpar@464	4865	% also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
alpar@464	4866	\ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
alpar@464	4867	\global\advance \parencount by -1 }
alpar@464	4868	% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
alpar@464	4869	\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\&#1}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
alpar@464	4870	%
alpar@464	4871	\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
alpar@464	4872	} % End of definition inside \activeparens
alpar@464	4873	%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
alpar@464	4874	%% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ]
alpar@464	4875	\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
alpar@464	4876	\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
alpar@464	4877	\let\ampnr = \&
alpar@464	4878	\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
alpar@464	4879	\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
alpar@464	4880
alpar@464	4881	% Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.
alpar@464	4882	{
alpar@464	4883	\catcode`& = \active
alpar@464	4884	\global\let& = \ampnr
alpar@464	4885	}
alpar@464	4886
alpar@464	4887	% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
alpar@464	4888	% #1 is the function name.
alpar@464	4889	% #2 is the type of definition, such as "Function".
alpar@464	4890	%
alpar@464	4891	\def\defname#1#2{%
alpar@464	4892	% How we'll output the type name. Putting it in brackets helps
alpar@464	4893	% distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
alpar@464	4894	% just below it.
alpar@464	4895	\ifempty{#2}%
alpar@464	4896	\def\defnametype{}%
alpar@464	4897	\else
alpar@464	4898	\def\defnametype{[\rm #2]}%
alpar@464	4899	\fi
alpar@464	4900	%
alpar@464	4901	% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
alpar@464	4902	\dimen2=\leftskip
alpar@464	4903	\advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
alpar@464	4904	%
alpar@464	4905	% Figure out values for the paragraph shape.
alpar@464	4906	\setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\defnametype}}%
alpar@464	4907	\dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
alpar@464	4908	\dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent % size for continuations
alpar@464	4909	\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
alpar@464	4910	%
alpar@464	4911	% Output arg 2 ("Function" or some such) but stuck inside a box of
alpar@464	4912	% width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking.
alpar@464	4913	\noindent
alpar@464	4914	%
alpar@464	4915	{% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
alpar@464	4916	% so that \rightline will obey them.
alpar@464	4917	\advance \hsize by -\dimen2
alpar@464	4918	\dimen3 = 0pt % was -1.25pc
alpar@464	4919	\rlap{\rightline{\defnametype\kern\dimen3}}%
alpar@464	4920	}%
alpar@464	4921	%
alpar@464	4922	% Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
alpar@464	4923	\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
alpar@464	4924	\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
alpar@464	4925	\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
alpar@464	4926	{\df #1}\enskip % output function name
alpar@464	4927	% \defunargs will be called next to output the arguments, if any.
alpar@464	4928	}
alpar@464	4929
alpar@464	4930	% Common pieces to start any @def...
alpar@464	4931	% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
alpar@464	4932	% #2 is the \...x control sequence (which our caller defines).
alpar@464	4933	% #3 is the control sequence to process the header, such as \defunheader.
alpar@464	4934	%
alpar@464	4935	\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
alpar@464	4936	\begingroup\inENV
alpar@464	4937	% If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
alpar@464	4938	% which is there to keep the function description together with its
alpar@464	4939	% header. But if there's nothing but headers, we want to allow a
alpar@464	4940	% break after all. Check for penalty 10002 (inserted by
alpar@464	4941	% \defargscommonending) instead of 10000, since the sectioning
alpar@464	4942	% commands insert a \penalty10000, and we don't want to allow a break
alpar@464	4943	% between a section heading and a defun.
alpar@464	4944	\ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty0 \fi
alpar@464	4945	\medbreak
alpar@464	4946	%
alpar@464	4947	% Define the \E... end token that this defining construct specifies
alpar@464	4948	% so that it will exit this group.
alpar@464	4949	\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
alpar@464	4950	%
alpar@464	4951	\parindent=0in
alpar@464	4952	\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
alpar@464	4953	\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
alpar@464	4954	}
alpar@464	4955
alpar@464	4956	% Common part of the \...x definitions.
alpar@464	4957	%
alpar@464	4958	\def\defxbodycommon{%
alpar@464	4959	% As with \parsebodycommon above, allow line break if we have multiple
alpar@464	4960	% x headers in a row. It's not a great place, though.
alpar@464	4961	\ifnum\lastpenalty=10000 \penalty1000 \fi
alpar@464	4962	%
alpar@464	4963	\begingroup\obeylines
alpar@464	4964	}
alpar@464	4965
alpar@464	4966	% Process body of @defun, @deffn, @defmac, etc.
alpar@464	4967	%
alpar@464	4968	\def\defparsebody#1#2#3{%
alpar@464	4969	\parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
alpar@464	4970	\def#2{\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit#3}%
alpar@464	4971	\catcode\equalChar=\active
alpar@464	4972	\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
alpar@464	4973	\spacesplit#3%
alpar@464	4974	}
alpar@464	4975
alpar@464	4976	% #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \parsebodycommon above).
alpar@464	4977	% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
alpar@464	4978	%
alpar@464	4979	\def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
alpar@464	4980	\parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
alpar@464	4981	\def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
alpar@464	4982	\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
alpar@464	4983	% The \empty here prevents misinterpretation of a construct such as
alpar@464	4984	% @deffn {whatever} {Enharmonic comma}
alpar@464	4985	% See comments at \deftpparsebody, although in our case we don't have
alpar@464	4986	% to remove the \empty afterwards, since it is empty.
alpar@464	4987	\spacesplit{#3{#4}}\empty
alpar@464	4988	}
alpar@464	4989
alpar@464	4990	% Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.
alpar@464	4991	% #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \defparsebody).
alpar@464	4992	% #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.
alpar@464	4993	% #5 is the method's return type.
alpar@464	4994	%
alpar@464	4995	\def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {%
alpar@464	4996	\parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
alpar@464	4997	\def#2##1 ##2 {\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
alpar@464	4998	\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
alpar@464	4999	\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}%
alpar@464	5000	}
alpar@464	5001
alpar@464	5002	% Used for @deftypeop. The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an
alpar@464	5003	% extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it
alpar@464	5004	% being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'. We have
alpar@464	5005	% to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the
alpar@464	5006	% input at hand. Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for
alpar@464	5007	% the \E... definition to assign the category name to.
alpar@464	5008	%
alpar@464	5009	\def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {%
alpar@464	5010	\parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
alpar@464	5011	\def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {\def#4{##1}%
alpar@464	5012	\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}%
alpar@464	5013	\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
alpar@464	5014	\spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}%
alpar@464	5015	}
alpar@464	5016
alpar@464	5017	% For @defop.
alpar@464	5018	\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {%
alpar@464	5019	\parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
alpar@464	5020	\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
alpar@464	5021	\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
alpar@464	5022	\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
alpar@464	5023	\spacesplit{#3{#5}}%
alpar@464	5024	}
alpar@464	5025
alpar@464	5026	% These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
alpar@464	5027	% except that they do not make parens into active characters.
alpar@464	5028	% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
alpar@464	5029	%
alpar@464	5030	\def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{%
alpar@464	5031	\parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
alpar@464	5032	\def#2{\defxbodycommon \spacesplit#3}%
alpar@464	5033	\catcode\equalChar=\active
alpar@464	5034	\begingroup\obeylines
alpar@464	5035	\spacesplit#3%
alpar@464	5036	}
alpar@464	5037
alpar@464	5038	% @defopvar.
alpar@464	5039	\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {%
alpar@464	5040	\parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
alpar@464	5041	\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
alpar@464	5042	\defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
alpar@464	5043	\begingroup\obeylines
alpar@464	5044	\spacesplit{#3{#5}}%
alpar@464	5045	}
alpar@464	5046
alpar@464	5047	\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
alpar@464	5048	\parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
alpar@464	5049	\def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
alpar@464	5050	\begingroup\obeylines
alpar@464	5051	\spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
alpar@464	5052	}
alpar@464	5053
alpar@464	5054	% This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
alpar@464	5055	% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
alpar@464	5056	% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument. Sigh.
alpar@464	5057	% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
alpar@464	5058	%
alpar@464	5059	% So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name. That
alpar@464	5060	% way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
alpar@464	5061	% won't strip off the braces.
alpar@464	5062	%
alpar@464	5063	\def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
alpar@464	5064	\parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
alpar@464	5065	\def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
alpar@464	5066	\begingroup\obeylines
alpar@464	5067	\spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
alpar@464	5068	}
alpar@464	5069
alpar@464	5070	% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty and the
alpar@464	5071	% braces (if any). That's what this does.
alpar@464	5072	%
alpar@464	5073	\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
alpar@464	5074
alpar@464	5075	% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
alpar@464	5076	% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
alpar@464	5077	% (which might be empty) the arguments.
alpar@464	5078	%
alpar@464	5079	\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
alpar@464	5080	#1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
alpar@464	5081	}%
alpar@464	5082
alpar@464	5083	% Split up #2 (the rest of the input line) at the first space token.
alpar@464	5084	% call #1 with two arguments:
alpar@464	5085	% the first is all of #2 before the space token,
alpar@464	5086	% the second is all of #2 after that space token.
alpar@464	5087	% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
alpar@464	5088	% and the second is passed as empty.
alpar@464	5089	%
alpar@464	5090	{\obeylines %
alpar@464	5091	\gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitx{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitx}%
alpar@464	5092	\long\gdef\spacesplitx#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitx{%
alpar@464	5093	\ifx\relax #3%
alpar@464	5094	#1{#2}{}%
alpar@464	5095	\else %
alpar@464	5096	#1{#2}{#3#4}%
alpar@464	5097	\fi}%
alpar@464	5098	}
alpar@464	5099
alpar@464	5100	% Define @defun.
alpar@464	5101
alpar@464	5102	% This is called to end the arguments processing for all the @def... commands.
alpar@464	5103	%
alpar@464	5104	\def\defargscommonending{%
alpar@464	5105	\interlinepenalty = 10000
alpar@464	5106	\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
alpar@464	5107	\endgraf
alpar@464	5108	\nobreak\vskip -\parskip
alpar@464	5109	\penalty 10002 % signal to \parsebodycommon.
alpar@464	5110	}
alpar@464	5111
alpar@464	5112	% This expands the args and terminates the paragraph they comprise.
alpar@464	5113	%
alpar@464	5114	\def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl
alpar@464	5115	% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
alpar@464	5116	% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
alpar@464	5117	% Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.
alpar@464	5118	{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}%
alpar@464	5119	#1%
alpar@464	5120	{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}%
alpar@464	5121	\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
alpar@464	5122	\defargscommonending
alpar@464	5123	}
alpar@464	5124
alpar@464	5125	\def\deftypefunargs #1{%
alpar@464	5126	% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
alpar@464	5127	% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
alpar@464	5128	% Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
alpar@464	5129	\boldbraxnoamp
alpar@464	5130	\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
alpar@464	5131	\defargscommonending
alpar@464	5132	}
alpar@464	5133
alpar@464	5134	% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
alpar@464	5135
alpar@464	5136	% @deffn Command forward-char nchars
alpar@464	5137
alpar@464	5138	\def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
alpar@464	5139
alpar@464	5140	\def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
alpar@464	5141	\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
alpar@464	5142	\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
alpar@464	5143	}
alpar@464	5144
alpar@464	5145	% @defun == @deffn Function
alpar@464	5146
alpar@464	5147	\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
alpar@464	5148
alpar@464	5149	\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
alpar@464	5150	\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}%
alpar@464	5151	\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
alpar@464	5152	\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
alpar@464	5153	}
alpar@464	5154
alpar@464	5155	% @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
alpar@464	5156
alpar@464	5157	\def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
alpar@464	5158
alpar@464	5159	% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name and args.
alpar@464	5160	\def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
alpar@464	5161	% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
alpar@464	5162	\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
alpar@464	5163	\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
alpar@464	5164	\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
alpar@464	5165	\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
alpar@464	5166	\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
alpar@464	5167	}
alpar@464	5168
alpar@464	5169	% @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
alpar@464	5170
alpar@464	5171	\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
alpar@464	5172
alpar@464	5173	% \defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$
alpar@464	5174	% puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
alpar@464	5175	\def\defheaderxcond#1#2$.${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
alpar@464	5176
alpar@464	5177	% #1 is the classification. #2 is the data type. #3 is the name and args.
alpar@464	5178	\def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
alpar@464	5179	% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
alpar@464	5180	\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
alpar@464	5181	\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
alpar@464	5182	\begingroup
alpar@464	5183	\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
alpar@464	5184	% at least some C++ text from working
alpar@464	5185	\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}%
alpar@464	5186	\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
alpar@464	5187	\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
alpar@464	5188	}
alpar@464	5189
alpar@464	5190	% @defmac == @deffn Macro
alpar@464	5191
alpar@464	5192	\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
alpar@464	5193
alpar@464	5194	\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
alpar@464	5195	\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}%
alpar@464	5196	\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
alpar@464	5197	\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
alpar@464	5198	}
alpar@464	5199
alpar@464	5200	% @defspec == @deffn Special Form
alpar@464	5201
alpar@464	5202	\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
alpar@464	5203
alpar@464	5204	\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
alpar@464	5205	\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}%
alpar@464	5206	\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
alpar@464	5207	\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
alpar@464	5208	}
alpar@464	5209
alpar@464	5210	% @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
alpar@464	5211	%
alpar@464	5212	\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
alpar@464	5213	\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
alpar@464	5214	%
alpar@464	5215	\def\defopheader#1#2#3{%
alpar@464	5216	\dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% function index entry
alpar@464	5217	\begingroup
alpar@464	5218	\defname{#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}%
alpar@464	5219	\defunargs{#3}%
alpar@464	5220	\endgroup
alpar@464	5221	}
alpar@464	5222
alpar@464	5223	% @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG...
alpar@464	5224	%
alpar@464	5225	\def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}%
alpar@464	5226	\deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader
alpar@464	5227	\deftypeopcategory}
alpar@464	5228	%
alpar@464	5229	% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args.
alpar@464	5230	\def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{%
alpar@464	5231	\dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
alpar@464	5232	\begingroup
alpar@464	5233	\defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
alpar@464	5234	{\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}%
alpar@464	5235	\deftypefunargs{#4}%
alpar@464	5236	\endgroup
alpar@464	5237	}
alpar@464	5238
alpar@464	5239	% @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG...
alpar@464	5240	%
alpar@464	5241	\def\deftypemethod{%
alpar@464	5242	\deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
alpar@464	5243	%
alpar@464	5244	% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
alpar@464	5245	\def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
alpar@464	5246	\dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
alpar@464	5247	\begingroup
alpar@464	5248	\defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
alpar@464	5249	\deftypefunargs{#4}%
alpar@464	5250	\endgroup
alpar@464	5251	}
alpar@464	5252
alpar@464	5253	% @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME
alpar@464	5254	%
alpar@464	5255	\def\deftypeivar{%
alpar@464	5256	\deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}
alpar@464	5257	%
alpar@464	5258	% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.
alpar@464	5259	\def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{%
alpar@464	5260	\dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index
alpar@464	5261	\begingroup
alpar@464	5262	\defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
alpar@464	5263	{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}%
alpar@464	5264	\defvarargs{#3}%
alpar@464	5265	\endgroup
alpar@464	5266	}
alpar@464	5267
alpar@464	5268	% @defmethod == @defop Method
alpar@464	5269	%
alpar@464	5270	\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
alpar@464	5271	%
alpar@464	5272	% #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
alpar@464	5273	\def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
alpar@464	5274	\dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
alpar@464	5275	\begingroup
alpar@464	5276	\defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
alpar@464	5277	\defunargs{#3}%
alpar@464	5278	\endgroup
alpar@464	5279	}
alpar@464	5280
alpar@464	5281	% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
alpar@464	5282
alpar@464	5283	\def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
alpar@464	5284	\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
alpar@464	5285
alpar@464	5286	\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
alpar@464	5287	\dosubind{vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% variable index entry
alpar@464	5288	\begingroup
alpar@464	5289	\defname{#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
alpar@464	5290	\defvarargs{#3}%
alpar@464	5291	\endgroup
alpar@464	5292	}
alpar@464	5293
alpar@464	5294	% @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME
alpar@464	5295	%
alpar@464	5296	\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
alpar@464	5297	%
alpar@464	5298	\def\defivarheader#1#2#3{%
alpar@464	5299	\dosubind{vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in var index
alpar@464	5300	\begingroup
alpar@464	5301	\defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}%
alpar@464	5302	\defvarargs{#3}%
alpar@464	5303	\endgroup
alpar@464	5304	}
alpar@464	5305
alpar@464	5306	% @defvar
alpar@464	5307	% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
alpar@464	5308	% This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
alpar@464	5309	% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
alpar@464	5310	\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
alpar@464	5311	\defargscommonending
alpar@464	5312	}
alpar@464	5313
alpar@464	5314	% @defvr Counter foo-count
alpar@464	5315
alpar@464	5316	\def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
alpar@464	5317
alpar@464	5318	\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
alpar@464	5319	\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
alpar@464	5320
alpar@464	5321	% @defvar == @defvr Variable
alpar@464	5322
alpar@464	5323	\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
alpar@464	5324
alpar@464	5325	\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
alpar@464	5326	\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
alpar@464	5327	\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
alpar@464	5328	}
alpar@464	5329
alpar@464	5330	% @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
alpar@464	5331
alpar@464	5332	\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
alpar@464	5333
alpar@464	5334	\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
alpar@464	5335	\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}%
alpar@464	5336	\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
alpar@464	5337	}
alpar@464	5338
alpar@464	5339	% @deftypevar int foobar
alpar@464	5340
alpar@464	5341	\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
alpar@464	5342
alpar@464	5343	% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
alpar@464	5344	% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
alpar@464	5345	\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
alpar@464	5346	\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
alpar@464	5347	\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
alpar@464	5348	\defargscommonending
alpar@464	5349	\endgroup}
alpar@464	5350	\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
alpar@464	5351
alpar@464	5352	% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
alpar@464	5353
alpar@464	5354	\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
alpar@464	5355
alpar@464	5356	\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
alpar@464	5357	\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}
alpar@464	5358	\defargscommonending
alpar@464	5359	\endgroup}
alpar@464	5360
alpar@464	5361	% Now define @deftp
alpar@464	5362	% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
alpar@464	5363
alpar@464	5364	\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
alpar@464	5365
alpar@464	5366	% @deftp Class window height width ...
alpar@464	5367
alpar@464	5368	\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
alpar@464	5369
alpar@464	5370	\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
alpar@464	5371	\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
alpar@464	5372
alpar@464	5373	% These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)
alpar@464	5374	% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
alpar@464	5375	%
alpar@464	5376	\def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
alpar@464	5377	\def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
alpar@464	5378	\def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
alpar@464	5379	\def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
alpar@464	5380	\def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
alpar@464	5381	\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
alpar@464	5382	\def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
alpar@464	5383	\def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
alpar@464	5384	\def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
alpar@464	5385	\def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
alpar@464	5386	\def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
alpar@464	5387	\def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}}
alpar@464	5388	\def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
alpar@464	5389	\def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}}
alpar@464	5390	\def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
alpar@464	5391	\def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
alpar@464	5392	\def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
alpar@464	5393	\def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
alpar@464	5394	\def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
alpar@464	5395
alpar@464	5396
alpar@464	5397	\message{macros,}
alpar@464	5398	% @macro.
alpar@464	5399
alpar@464	5400	% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
alpar@464	5401	% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
alpar@464	5402	\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
alpar@464	5403	\newwrite\macscribble
alpar@464	5404	\def\scanmacro#1{%
alpar@464	5405	\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
alpar@464	5406	% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
alpar@464	5407	\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other \escapechar=`\@
alpar@464	5408	% Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
alpar@464	5409	\toks0={#1\endinput}%
alpar@464	5410	\immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
alpar@464	5411	\immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
alpar@464	5412	\immediate\closeout\macscribble
alpar@464	5413	\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
alpar@464	5414	\input \jobname.tmp
alpar@464	5415	\endgroup
alpar@464	5416	}
alpar@464	5417	\else
alpar@464	5418	\def\scanmacro#1{%
alpar@464	5419	\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
alpar@464	5420	% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
alpar@464	5421	\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other \escapechar=`\@
alpar@464	5422	\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
alpar@464	5423	\fi
alpar@464	5424
alpar@464	5425	\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
alpar@464	5426	\newtoks\macname % Macro name
alpar@464	5427	\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
alpar@464	5428	\def\macrolist{} % List of all defined macros in the form
alpar@464	5429	% \do\macro1\do\macro2...
alpar@464	5430
alpar@464	5431	% Utility routines.
alpar@464	5432	% Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
alpar@464	5433	\def\cslet#1#2{%
alpar@464	5434	\expandafter\expandafter
alpar@464	5435	\expandafter\let
alpar@464	5436	\expandafter\expandafter
alpar@464	5437	\csname#1\endcsname
alpar@464	5438	\csname#2\endcsname}
alpar@464	5439
alpar@464	5440	% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
alpar@464	5441	% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
alpar@464	5442	{\catcode`\@=11
alpar@464	5443	\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
alpar@464	5444	\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
alpar@464	5445	\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
alpar@464	5446	\def\unbrace#1{#1}
alpar@464	5447	\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
alpar@464	5448	}
alpar@464	5449
alpar@464	5450	% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
alpar@464	5451	{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
alpar@464	5452	\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
alpar@464	5453	\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
alpar@464	5454	\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
alpar@464	5455	}
alpar@464	5456
alpar@464	5457	% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
alpar@464	5458	% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
alpar@464	5459	% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
alpar@464	5460
alpar@464	5461	% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
alpar@464	5462	% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
alpar@464	5463	% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
alpar@464	5464
alpar@464	5465	\def\macrobodyctxt{%
alpar@464	5466	\catcode`\~=\other
alpar@464	5467	\catcode`\^=\other
alpar@464	5468	\catcode`\_=\other
alpar@464	5469	\catcode`\\|=\other
alpar@464	5470	\catcode`\<=\other
alpar@464	5471	\catcode`\>=\other
alpar@464	5472	\catcode`\+=\other
alpar@464	5473	\catcode`\{=\other
alpar@464	5474	\catcode`\}=\other
alpar@464	5475	\catcode`\@=\other
alpar@464	5476	\catcode`\^^M=\other
alpar@464	5477	\usembodybackslash}
alpar@464	5478
alpar@464	5479	\def\macroargctxt{%
alpar@464	5480	\catcode`\~=\other
alpar@464	5481	\catcode`\^=\other
alpar@464	5482	\catcode`\_=\other
alpar@464	5483	\catcode`\\|=\other
alpar@464	5484	\catcode`\<=\other
alpar@464	5485	\catcode`\>=\other
alpar@464	5486	\catcode`\+=\other
alpar@464	5487	\catcode`\@=\other
alpar@464	5488	\catcode`\\=\other}
alpar@464	5489
alpar@464	5490	% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
alpar@464	5491	% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
alpar@464	5492	% where N is the macro parameter number.
alpar@464	5493	% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
alpar@464	5494	% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
alpar@464	5495
alpar@464	5496	{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
alpar@464	5497	@gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
alpar@464	5498	@gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
alpar@464	5499	}
alpar@464	5500	\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
alpar@464	5501
alpar@464	5502	\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
alpar@464	5503	\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
alpar@464	5504
alpar@464	5505	\def\macroxxx#1{%
alpar@464	5506	\getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
alpar@464	5507	\ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
alpar@464	5508	\paramno=0%
alpar@464	5509	\else
alpar@464	5510	\expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
alpar@464	5511	\fi
alpar@464	5512	\if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
alpar@464	5513	\message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
alpar@464	5514	\else
alpar@464	5515	\expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
alpar@464	5516	\else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
alpar@464	5517	\global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
alpar@464	5518	\global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
alpar@464	5519	% Add the macroname to \macrolist
alpar@464	5520	\toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
alpar@464	5521	\xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
alpar@464	5522	\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
alpar@464	5523	\fi
alpar@464	5524	\begingroup \macrobodyctxt
alpar@464	5525	\ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
alpar@464	5526	\else \expandafter\parsemacbody
alpar@464	5527	\fi}
alpar@464	5528
alpar@464	5529	\def\unmacro{\parsearg\dounmacro}
alpar@464	5530	\def\dounmacro#1{%
alpar@464	5531	\if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
alpar@464	5532	\global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
alpar@464	5533	\global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
alpar@464	5534	% Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
alpar@464	5535	\begingroup
alpar@464	5536	\expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
alpar@464	5537	\let\do\unmacrodo
alpar@464	5538	\xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
alpar@464	5539	\endgroup
alpar@464	5540	\else
alpar@464	5541	\errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
alpar@464	5542	\fi
alpar@464	5543	}
alpar@464	5544
alpar@464	5545	% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
alpar@464	5546	% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
alpar@464	5547	%
alpar@464	5548	\def\unmacrodo#1{%
alpar@464	5549	\ifx#1\relax
alpar@464	5550	% remove this
alpar@464	5551	\else
alpar@464	5552	\noexpand\do \noexpand #1%
alpar@464	5553	\fi
alpar@464	5554	}
alpar@464	5555
alpar@464	5556	% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
alpar@464	5557	% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
alpar@464	5558	% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
alpar@464	5559	\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
alpar@464	5560	\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
alpar@464	5561	\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
alpar@464	5562	\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
alpar@464	5563
alpar@464	5564	% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
alpar@464	5565	% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah
alpar@464	5566	% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
alpar@464	5567	% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
alpar@464	5568
alpar@464	5569	% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
alpar@464	5570	% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
alpar@464	5571	% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
alpar@464	5572	% it to # just before using the token list produced.
alpar@464	5573	%
alpar@464	5574	% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
alpar@464	5575	% the macro is used.
alpar@464	5576
alpar@464	5577	\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
alpar@464	5578	\let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
alpar@464	5579	\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
alpar@464	5580	\if#1;\let\next=\relax
alpar@464	5581	\else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
alpar@464	5582	\advance\paramno by 1%
alpar@464	5583	\expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
alpar@464	5584	{\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
alpar@464	5585	\edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
alpar@464	5586	\fi\next}
alpar@464	5587
alpar@464	5588	% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
alpar@464	5589	% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
alpar@464	5590
alpar@464	5591	\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
alpar@464	5592	{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
alpar@464	5593	\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
alpar@464	5594	{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
alpar@464	5595
alpar@464	5596	% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
alpar@464	5597	% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
alpar@464	5598	% Much magic with \expandafter here.
alpar@464	5599	% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
alpar@464	5600	% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
alpar@464	5601	\def\defmacro{%
alpar@464	5602	\let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
alpar@464	5603	\ifrecursive
alpar@464	5604	\ifcase\paramno
alpar@464	5605	% 0
alpar@464	5606	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
alpar@464	5607	\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
alpar@464	5608	\or % 1
alpar@464	5609	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
alpar@464	5610	\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
alpar@464	5611	\noexpand\braceorline
alpar@464	5612	\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
alpar@464	5613	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
alpar@464	5614	\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
alpar@464	5615	\else % many
alpar@464	5616	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
alpar@464	5617	\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
alpar@464	5618	\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
alpar@464	5619	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
alpar@464	5620	\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
alpar@464	5621	\expandafter\expandafter
alpar@464	5622	\expandafter\xdef
alpar@464	5623	\expandafter\expandafter
alpar@464	5624	\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
alpar@464	5625	\paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
alpar@464	5626	\fi
alpar@464	5627	\else
alpar@464	5628	\ifcase\paramno
alpar@464	5629	% 0
alpar@464	5630	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
alpar@464	5631	\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
alpar@464	5632	\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
alpar@464	5633	\or % 1
alpar@464	5634	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
alpar@464	5635	\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
alpar@464	5636	\noexpand\braceorline
alpar@464	5637	\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
alpar@464	5638	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
alpar@464	5639	\egroup
alpar@464	5640	\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
alpar@464	5641	\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
alpar@464	5642	\else % many
alpar@464	5643	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
alpar@464	5644	\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
alpar@464	5645	\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
alpar@464	5646	\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
alpar@464	5647	\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
alpar@464	5648	\expandafter\expandafter
alpar@464	5649	\expandafter\xdef
alpar@464	5650	\expandafter\expandafter
alpar@464	5651	\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
alpar@464	5652	\paramlist{%
alpar@464	5653	\egroup
alpar@464	5654	\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
alpar@464	5655	\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
alpar@464	5656	\fi
alpar@464	5657	\fi}
alpar@464	5658
alpar@464	5659	\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
alpar@464	5660
alpar@464	5661	% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
alpar@464	5662	% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
alpar@464	5663	% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
alpar@464	5664	% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
alpar@464	5665	\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
alpar@464	5666	\def\braceorlinexxx{%
alpar@464	5667	\ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
alpar@464	5668	\expandafter\parsearg
alpar@464	5669	\fi \next}
alpar@464	5670
alpar@464	5671	% We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
alpar@464	5672	% expanded by \write.
alpar@464	5673	\def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
alpar@464	5674	\edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
alpar@464	5675
alpar@464	5676
alpar@464	5677	% @alias.
alpar@464	5678	% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
alpar@464	5679	% sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
alpar@464	5680	\def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx}
alpar@464	5681	\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
alpar@464	5682	\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces
alpar@464	5683	\edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=%
alpar@464	5684	\expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}%
alpar@464	5685	\expandafter\endgroup\next}
alpar@464	5686
alpar@464	5687
alpar@464	5688	\message{cross references,}
alpar@464	5689	% @xref etc.
alpar@464	5690
alpar@464	5691	\newwrite\auxfile
alpar@464	5692
alpar@464	5693	\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
alpar@464	5694	\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
alpar@464	5695
alpar@464	5696	% @inforef is relatively simple.
alpar@464	5697	\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
alpar@464	5698	\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
alpar@464	5699	node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
alpar@464	5700
alpar@464	5701	% @node's job is to define \lastnode.
alpar@464	5702	\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
alpar@464	5703	\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx #1,\finishnodeparse}
alpar@464	5704	\def\nodexxx#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
alpar@464	5705	\let\nwnode=\node
alpar@464	5706	\let\lastnode=\relax
alpar@464	5707
alpar@464	5708	% The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
alpar@464	5709	\def\donoderef{%
alpar@464	5710	\ifx\lastnode\relax\else
alpar@464	5711	\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
alpar@464	5712	{Ysectionnumberandtype}%
alpar@464	5713	\global\let\lastnode=\relax
alpar@464	5714	\fi
alpar@464	5715	}
alpar@464	5716	\def\unnumbnoderef{%
alpar@464	5717	\ifx\lastnode\relax\else
alpar@464	5718	\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
alpar@464	5719	\global\let\lastnode=\relax
alpar@464	5720	\fi
alpar@464	5721	}
alpar@464	5722	\def\appendixnoderef{%
alpar@464	5723	\ifx\lastnode\relax\else
alpar@464	5724	\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
alpar@464	5725	{Yappendixletterandtype}%
alpar@464	5726	\global\let\lastnode=\relax
alpar@464	5727	\fi
alpar@464	5728	}
alpar@464	5729
alpar@464	5730
alpar@464	5731	% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
alpar@464	5732	%
alpar@464	5733	\newcount\savesfregister
alpar@464	5734	\gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
alpar@464	5735	\gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
alpar@464	5736	\gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
alpar@464	5737
alpar@464	5738	% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
alpar@464	5739	% anchor), namely NAME-title (the corresponding @chapter/etc. name),
alpar@464	5740	% NAME-pg (the page number), and NAME-snt (section number and type).
alpar@464	5741	% Called from \foonoderef.
alpar@464	5742	%
alpar@464	5743	% We have to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section
alpar@464	5744	% title aren't expanded. It would be nicer not to expand the titles in
alpar@464	5745	% the first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
alpar@464	5746	%
alpar@464	5747	% Likewise, use \turnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
alpar@464	5748	% and backslash work in node names.
alpar@464	5749	%
alpar@464	5750	\def\setref#1#2{{%
alpar@464	5751	\atdummies
alpar@464	5752	\pdfmkdest{#1}%
alpar@464	5753	%
alpar@464	5754	\turnoffactive
alpar@464	5755	\dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
alpar@464	5756	\dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
alpar@464	5757	\dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}%
alpar@464	5758	}}
alpar@464	5759
alpar@464	5760	% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
alpar@464	5761	% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
alpar@464	5762	% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
alpar@464	5763	% manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
alpar@464	5764	%
alpar@464	5765	\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
alpar@464	5766	\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
alpar@464	5767	\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
alpar@464	5768	\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
alpar@464	5769	\unsepspaces
alpar@464	5770	\def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
alpar@464	5771	\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
alpar@464	5772	\setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
alpar@464	5773	\setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
alpar@464	5774	\ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
alpar@464	5775	% No printed node name was explicitly given.
alpar@464	5776	\expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
alpar@464	5777	% Use the node name inside the square brackets.
alpar@464	5778	\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
alpar@464	5779	\else
alpar@464	5780	% Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
alpar@464	5781	% the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
alpar@464	5782	\ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
alpar@464	5783	% It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
alpar@464	5784	\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
alpar@464	5785	\else
alpar@464	5786	\ifhavexrefs
alpar@464	5787	% We know the real title if we have the xref values.
alpar@464	5788	\def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
alpar@464	5789	\else
alpar@464	5790	% Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
alpar@464	5791	\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
alpar@464	5792	\fi%
alpar@464	5793	\fi
alpar@464	5794	\fi
alpar@464	5795	\fi
alpar@464	5796	%
alpar@464	5797	% If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
alpar@464	5798	% insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
alpar@464	5799	% not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
alpar@464	5800	% are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
alpar@464	5801	% is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
alpar@464	5802	% is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
alpar@464	5803	\ifpdf
alpar@464	5804	\leavevmode
alpar@464	5805	\getfilename{#4}%
alpar@464	5806	{\turnoffactive \otherbackslash
alpar@464	5807	\ifnum\filenamelength>0
alpar@464	5808	\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
alpar@464	5809	goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}%
alpar@464	5810	\else
alpar@464	5811	\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
alpar@464	5812	goto name{#1}%
alpar@464	5813	\fi
alpar@464	5814	}%
alpar@464	5815	\linkcolor
alpar@464	5816	\fi
alpar@464	5817	%
alpar@464	5818	\ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
alpar@464	5819	\putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
alpar@464	5820	\else
alpar@464	5821	% _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
alpar@464	5822	% control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
alpar@464	5823	% into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
alpar@464	5824	% printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
alpar@464	5825	% printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
alpar@464	5826	{\turnoffactive \otherbackslash
alpar@464	5827	% Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
alpar@464	5828	% @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
alpar@464	5829	\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
alpar@464	5830	\ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
alpar@464	5831	}%
alpar@464	5832	% output the `[mynode]' via a macro.
alpar@464	5833	\xrefprintnodename\printednodename
alpar@464	5834	%
alpar@464	5835	% But we always want a comma and a space:
alpar@464	5836	,\space
alpar@464	5837	%
alpar@464	5838	% output the `page 3'.
alpar@464	5839	\turnoffactive \otherbackslash \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
alpar@464	5840	\fi
alpar@464	5841	\endlink
alpar@464	5842	\endgroup}
alpar@464	5843
alpar@464	5844	% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
alpar@464	5845	% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
alpar@464	5846	% since not square brackets don't work in some documents. Particularly
alpar@464	5847	% one that Bob is working on :).
alpar@464	5848	%
alpar@464	5849	\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
alpar@464	5850
alpar@464	5851	% \dosetq is called from \setref to do the actual \write (\iflinks).
alpar@464	5852	%
alpar@464	5853	\def\dosetq#1#2{%
alpar@464	5854	{\let\folio=0%
alpar@464	5855	\edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
alpar@464	5856	\iflinks \next \fi
alpar@464	5857	}%
alpar@464	5858	}
alpar@464	5859
alpar@464	5860	% \internalsetq{foo}{page} expands into
alpar@464	5861	% CHARACTERS @xrdef{foo}{...expansion of \page...}
alpar@464	5862	\def\internalsetq#1#2{@xrdef{#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
alpar@464	5863
alpar@464	5864	% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq.
alpar@464	5865	%
alpar@464	5866	\def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
alpar@464	5867	\def\Ytitle{\thissection}
alpar@464	5868	\def\Ynothing{}
alpar@464	5869	\def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
alpar@464	5870	\ifnum\secno=0
alpar@464	5871	\putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
alpar@464	5872	\else \ifnum\subsecno=0
alpar@464	5873	\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
alpar@464	5874	\else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
alpar@464	5875	\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
alpar@464	5876	\else
alpar@464	5877	\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
alpar@464	5878	\fi\fi\fi
alpar@464	5879	}
alpar@464	5880
alpar@464	5881	\def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
alpar@464	5882	\ifnum\secno=0
alpar@464	5883	\putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
alpar@464	5884	\else \ifnum\subsecno=0
alpar@464	5885	\putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
alpar@464	5886	\else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
alpar@464	5887	\putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
alpar@464	5888	\else
alpar@464	5889	\putwordSection@tie
alpar@464	5890	@char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
alpar@464	5891	\fi\fi\fi
alpar@464	5892	}
alpar@464	5893
alpar@464	5894	% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
alpar@464	5895	% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
alpar@464	5896	%
alpar@464	5897	\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
alpar@464	5898	\let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
alpar@464	5899	\else
alpar@464	5900	\def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
alpar@464	5901	\fi
alpar@464	5902
alpar@464	5903	% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
alpar@464	5904	% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
alpar@464	5905	%
alpar@464	5906	\def\refx#1#2{%
alpar@464	5907	{%
alpar@464	5908	\indexnofonts
alpar@464	5909	\otherbackslash
alpar@464	5910	\expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
alpar@464	5911	\csname X#1\endcsname
alpar@464	5912	}%
alpar@464	5913	\ifx\thisrefX\relax
alpar@464	5914	% If not defined, say something at least.
alpar@464	5915	\angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
alpar@464	5916	\iflinks
alpar@464	5917	\ifhavexrefs
alpar@464	5918	\message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
alpar@464	5919	\else
alpar@464	5920	\ifwarnedxrefs\else
alpar@464	5921	\global\warnedxrefstrue
alpar@464	5922	\message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
alpar@464	5923	\fi
alpar@464	5924	\fi
alpar@464	5925	\fi
alpar@464	5926	\else
alpar@464	5927	% It's defined, so just use it.
alpar@464	5928	\thisrefX
alpar@464	5929	\fi
alpar@464	5930	#2% Output the suffix in any case.
alpar@464	5931	}
alpar@464	5932
alpar@464	5933	% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
alpar@464	5934	%
alpar@464	5935	\def\xrdef#1{\expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname}
alpar@464	5936
alpar@464	5937	% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
alpar@464	5938	\def\readauxfile{\begingroup
alpar@464	5939	\catcode`\^^@=\other
alpar@464	5940	\catcode`\^^A=\other
alpar@464	5941	\catcode`\^^B=\other
alpar@464	5942	\catcode`\^^C=\other
alpar@464	5943	\catcode`\^^D=\other
alpar@464	5944	\catcode`\^^E=\other
alpar@464	5945	\catcode`\^^F=\other
alpar@464	5946	\catcode`\^^G=\other
alpar@464	5947	\catcode`\^^H=\other
alpar@464	5948	\catcode`\^^K=\other
alpar@464	5949	\catcode`\^^L=\other
alpar@464	5950	\catcode`\^^N=\other
alpar@464	5951	\catcode`\^^P=\other
alpar@464	5952	\catcode`\^^Q=\other
alpar@464	5953	\catcode`\^^R=\other
alpar@464	5954	\catcode`\^^S=\other
alpar@464	5955	\catcode`\^^T=\other
alpar@464	5956	\catcode`\^^U=\other
alpar@464	5957	\catcode`\^^V=\other
alpar@464	5958	\catcode`\^^W=\other
alpar@464	5959	\catcode`\^^X=\other
alpar@464	5960	\catcode`\^^Z=\other
alpar@464	5961	\catcode`\^^[=\other
alpar@464	5962	\catcode`\^^\=\other
alpar@464	5963	\catcode`\^^]=\other
alpar@464	5964	\catcode`\^^^=\other
alpar@464	5965	\catcode`\^^_=\other
alpar@464	5966	% It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
alpar@464	5967	% in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
alpar@464	5968	% supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
alpar@464	5969	% that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
alpar@464	5970	% character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
alpar@464	5971	% b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
alpar@464	5972	% argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
alpar@464	5973	% all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
alpar@464	5974	%
alpar@464	5975	% The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
alpar@464	5976	% \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
alpar@464	5977	% and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
alpar@464	5978	%
alpar@464	5979	\catcode`\^=\other
alpar@464	5980	%
alpar@464	5981	% Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
alpar@464	5982	\catcode`\~=\other
alpar@464	5983	\catcode`\[=\other
alpar@464	5984	\catcode`\]=\other
alpar@464	5985	\catcode`\"=\other
alpar@464	5986	\catcode`\_=\other
alpar@464	5987	\catcode`\\|=\other
alpar@464	5988	\catcode`\<=\other
alpar@464	5989	\catcode`\>=\other
alpar@464	5990	\catcode`\$=\other
alpar@464	5991	\catcode`\#=\other
alpar@464	5992	\catcode`\&=\other
alpar@464	5993	\catcode`\%=\other
alpar@464	5994	\catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
alpar@464	5995	%
alpar@464	5996	% Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
alpar@464	5997	{%
alpar@464	5998	\count 1=128
alpar@464	5999	\def\loop{%
alpar@464	6000	\catcode\count 1=\other
alpar@464	6001	\advance\count 1 by 1
alpar@464	6002	\ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
alpar@464	6003	}%
alpar@464	6004	}%
alpar@464	6005	%
alpar@464	6006	% Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
alpar@464	6007	% entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
alpar@464	6008	% For example, @xrdef{$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
alpar@464	6009	% Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
alpar@464	6010	% but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
alpar@464	6011	\catcode`\\=\other
alpar@464	6012	%
alpar@464	6013	% @ is our escape character in .aux files.
alpar@464	6014	\catcode`\{=1
alpar@464	6015	\catcode`\}=2
alpar@464	6016	\catcode`\@=0
alpar@464	6017	%
alpar@464	6018	\openin 1 \jobname.aux
alpar@464	6019	\ifeof 1 \else
alpar@464	6020	\closein 1
alpar@464	6021	\input \jobname.aux
alpar@464	6022	\global\havexrefstrue
alpar@464	6023	\fi
alpar@464	6024	% Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
alpar@464	6025	\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
alpar@464	6026	\endgroup}
alpar@464	6027
alpar@464	6028
alpar@464	6029	% Footnotes.
alpar@464	6030
alpar@464	6031	\newcount \footnoteno
alpar@464	6032
alpar@464	6033	% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
alpar@464	6034	% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
alpar@464	6035	% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
alpar@464	6036	% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
alpar@464	6037	% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
alpar@464	6038	\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
alpar@464	6039
alpar@464	6040	% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
alpar@464	6041	\let\footnotestyle=\comment
alpar@464	6042
alpar@464	6043	\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
alpar@464	6044
alpar@464	6045	{\catcode `\@=11
alpar@464	6046	%
alpar@464	6047	% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
alpar@464	6048	\gdef\footnote{%
alpar@464	6049	\let\indent=\ptexindent
alpar@464	6050	\global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
alpar@464	6051	\edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
alpar@464	6052	%
alpar@464	6053	% In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
alpar@464	6054	% extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
alpar@464	6055	\let\@sf\empty
alpar@464	6056	\ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
alpar@464	6057	%
alpar@464	6058	% Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
alpar@464	6059	\unskip
alpar@464	6060	\thisfootno\@sf
alpar@464	6061	\dofootnote
alpar@464	6062	}%
alpar@464	6063
alpar@464	6064	% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
alpar@464	6065	% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
alpar@464	6066	%
alpar@464	6067	% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
alpar@464	6068	% \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
alpar@464	6069	% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
alpar@464	6070	%
alpar@464	6071	% The start of the footnote looks usually like this:
alpar@464	6072	\gdef\startfootins{\insert\footins\bgroup}
alpar@464	6073	%
alpar@464	6074	% ... but this macro is redefined inside @multitable.
alpar@464	6075	%
alpar@464	6076	\gdef\dofootnote{%
alpar@464	6077	\startfootins
alpar@464	6078	% We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
alpar@464	6079	% footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
alpar@464	6080	% So reset some parameters.
alpar@464	6081	\hsize=\pagewidth
alpar@464	6082	\interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
alpar@464	6083	\splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
alpar@464	6084	\splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
alpar@464	6085	\floatingpenalty\@MM
alpar@464	6086	\leftskip\z@skip
alpar@464	6087	\rightskip\z@skip
alpar@464	6088	\spaceskip\z@skip
alpar@464	6089	\xspaceskip\z@skip
alpar@464	6090	\parindent\defaultparindent
alpar@464	6091	%
alpar@464	6092	\smallfonts \rm
alpar@464	6093	%
alpar@464	6094	% Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
alpar@464	6095	% to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
alpar@464	6096	% hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
alpar@464	6097	% text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
alpar@464	6098	\let\noindent = \relax
alpar@464	6099	%
alpar@464	6100	% Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
alpar@464	6101	% footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
alpar@464	6102	\everypar = {\hang}%
alpar@464	6103	\textindent{\thisfootno}%
alpar@464	6104	%
alpar@464	6105	% Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
alpar@464	6106	% expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
alpar@464	6107	% provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
alpar@464	6108	\footstrut
alpar@464	6109	\futurelet\next\fo@t
alpar@464	6110	}
alpar@464	6111	}%end \catcode `\@=11
alpar@464	6112
alpar@464	6113	% @\| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
alpar@464	6114	% surround any changed text. This approach does not work if the
alpar@464	6115	% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
alpar@464	6116	% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
alpar@464	6117	% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
alpar@464	6118	%
alpar@464	6119	\def\\|{%
alpar@464	6120	% \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
alpar@464	6121	\leavevmode
alpar@464	6122	%
alpar@464	6123	% Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
alpar@464	6124	\vadjust{%
alpar@464	6125	% We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
alpar@464	6126	% leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
alpar@464	6127	\vskip-\baselineskip
alpar@464	6128	%
alpar@464	6129	% \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
alpar@464	6130	% the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
alpar@464	6131	\llap{%
alpar@464	6132	%
alpar@464	6133	% For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
alpar@464	6134	\vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
alpar@464	6135	%
alpar@464	6136	% This is the space between the bar and the text.
alpar@464	6137	\hskip 12pt
alpar@464	6138	}%
alpar@464	6139	}%
alpar@464	6140	}
alpar@464	6141
alpar@464	6142	% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
alpar@464	6143	% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
alpar@464	6144	% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
alpar@464	6145	%
alpar@464	6146	\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
alpar@464	6147
alpar@464	6148	% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
alpar@464	6149	% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
alpar@464	6150	%
alpar@464	6151	% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
alpar@464	6152	% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
alpar@464	6153	% undone and the next image would fail.
alpar@464	6154	\openin 1 = epsf.tex
alpar@464	6155	\ifeof 1 \else
alpar@464	6156	\closein 1
alpar@464	6157	% Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
alpar@464	6158	% doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
alpar@464	6159	\def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
alpar@464	6160	\input epsf.tex
alpar@464	6161	\fi
alpar@464	6162	%
alpar@464	6163	% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
alpar@464	6164	\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
alpar@464	6165	\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
alpar@464	6166	work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
alpar@464	6167	it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
alpar@464	6168	%
alpar@464	6169	\def\image#1{%
alpar@464	6170	\ifx\epsfbox\undefined
alpar@464	6171	\ifwarnednoepsf \else
alpar@464	6172	\errhelp = \noepsfhelp
alpar@464	6173	\errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
alpar@464	6174	\global\warnednoepsftrue
alpar@464	6175	\fi
alpar@464	6176	\else
alpar@464	6177	\imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
alpar@464	6178	\fi
alpar@464	6179	}
alpar@464	6180	%
alpar@464	6181	% Arguments to @image:
alpar@464	6182	% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
alpar@464	6183	% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
alpar@464	6184	% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
alpar@464	6185	% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
alpar@464	6186	% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
alpar@464	6187	\newif\ifimagevmode
alpar@464	6188	\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
alpar@464	6189	\catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
alpar@464	6190	\normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
alpar@464	6191	% If the image is by itself, center it.
alpar@464	6192	\ifvmode
alpar@464	6193	\imagevmodetrue
alpar@464	6194	\nobreak\bigskip
alpar@464	6195	% Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
alpar@464	6196	% \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
alpar@464	6197	% above and below.
alpar@464	6198	\nobreak\vskip\parskip
alpar@464	6199	\nobreak
alpar@464	6200	\line\bgroup\hss
alpar@464	6201	\fi
alpar@464	6202	%
alpar@464	6203	% Output the image.
alpar@464	6204	\ifpdf
alpar@464	6205	\dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
alpar@464	6206	\else
alpar@464	6207	% \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
alpar@464	6208	\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
alpar@464	6209	\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
alpar@464	6210	\epsfbox{#1.eps}%
alpar@464	6211	\fi
alpar@464	6212	%
alpar@464	6213	\ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi % space after the image
alpar@464	6214	\endgroup}
alpar@464	6215
alpar@464	6216
alpar@464	6217	\message{localization,}
alpar@464	6218	% and i18n.
alpar@464	6219
alpar@464	6220	% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
alpar@464	6221	% @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything
alpar@464	6222	% properly. Single argument is the language abbreviation.
alpar@464	6223	% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
alpar@464	6224	%
alpar@464	6225	\def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage}
alpar@464	6226	\def\dodocumentlanguage#1{%
alpar@464	6227	\tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
alpar@464	6228	% Read the file if it exists.
alpar@464	6229	\openin 1 txi-#1.tex
alpar@464	6230	\ifeof1
alpar@464	6231	\errhelp = \nolanghelp
alpar@464	6232	\errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
alpar@464	6233	\let\temp = \relax
alpar@464	6234	\else
alpar@464	6235	\def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }%
alpar@464	6236	\fi
alpar@464	6237	\temp
alpar@464	6238	\endgroup
alpar@464	6239	}
alpar@464	6240	\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
alpar@464	6241	is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory
alpar@464	6242	should work if nowhere else does.}
alpar@464	6243
alpar@464	6244
alpar@464	6245	% @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
alpar@464	6246	% likely, but for now just recognize it.
alpar@464	6247	\let\documentencoding = \comment
alpar@464	6248
alpar@464	6249
alpar@464	6250	% Page size parameters.
alpar@464	6251	%
alpar@464	6252	\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
alpar@464	6253
alpar@464	6254	\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
alpar@464	6255	\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
alpar@464	6256	\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
alpar@464	6257
alpar@464	6258	% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
alpar@464	6259	\vbadness = 10000
alpar@464	6260
alpar@464	6261	% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
alpar@464	6262	\hbadness = 2000
alpar@464	6263
alpar@464	6264	% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
alpar@464	6265	\widowpenalty=10000
alpar@464	6266	\clubpenalty=10000
alpar@464	6267
alpar@464	6268	% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
alpar@464	6269	% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
alpar@464	6270	% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
alpar@464	6271	% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
alpar@464	6272	%
alpar@464	6273	\def\setemergencystretch{%
alpar@464	6274	\ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
alpar@464	6275	% Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
alpar@464	6276	\def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
alpar@464	6277	\else
alpar@464	6278	\emergencystretch = .15\hsize
alpar@464	6279	\fi
alpar@464	6280	}
alpar@464	6281
alpar@464	6282	% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
alpar@464	6283	% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 7) physical page height; 8)
alpar@464	6284	% physical page width.
alpar@464	6285	%
alpar@464	6286	% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
alpar@464	6287	% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
alpar@464	6288	%
alpar@464	6289	\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
alpar@464	6290	\voffset = #3\relax
alpar@464	6291	\topskip = #6\relax
alpar@464	6292	\splittopskip = \topskip
alpar@464	6293	%
alpar@464	6294	\vsize = #1\relax
alpar@464	6295	\advance\vsize by \topskip
alpar@464	6296	\outervsize = \vsize
alpar@464	6297	\advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
alpar@464	6298	\pageheight = \vsize
alpar@464	6299	%
alpar@464	6300	\hsize = #2\relax
alpar@464	6301	\outerhsize = \hsize
alpar@464	6302	\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
alpar@464	6303	\pagewidth = \hsize
alpar@464	6304	%
alpar@464	6305	\normaloffset = #4\relax
alpar@464	6306	\bindingoffset = #5\relax
alpar@464	6307	%
alpar@464	6308	\ifpdf
alpar@464	6309	\pdfpageheight #7\relax
alpar@464	6310	\pdfpagewidth #8\relax
alpar@464	6311	\fi
alpar@464	6312	%
alpar@464	6313	\setleading{\textleading}
alpar@464	6314	%
alpar@464	6315	\parindent = \defaultparindent
alpar@464	6316	\setemergencystretch
alpar@464	6317	}
alpar@464	6318
alpar@464	6319	% @letterpaper (the default).
alpar@464	6320	\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
alpar@464	6321	\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
alpar@464	6322	\textleading = 13.2pt
alpar@464	6323	%
alpar@464	6324	% If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
alpar@464	6325	\internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}%
alpar@464	6326	{\voffset}{.25in}%
alpar@464	6327	{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
alpar@464	6328	{11in}{8.5in}%
alpar@464	6329	}}
alpar@464	6330
alpar@464	6331	% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
alpar@464	6332	\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
alpar@464	6333	\parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
alpar@464	6334	\textleading = 12pt
alpar@464	6335	%
alpar@464	6336	\internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
alpar@464	6337	{\voffset}{.25in}%
alpar@464	6338	{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
alpar@464	6339	{9.25in}{7in}%
alpar@464	6340	%
alpar@464	6341	\lispnarrowing = 0.3in
alpar@464	6342	\tolerance = 700
alpar@464	6343	\hfuzz = 1pt
alpar@464	6344	\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
alpar@464	6345	\defbodyindent = .5cm
alpar@464	6346	}}
alpar@464	6347
alpar@464	6348	% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
alpar@464	6349	\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
alpar@464	6350	\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
alpar@464	6351	\textleading = 13.2pt
alpar@464	6352	%
alpar@464	6353	% Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
alpar@464	6354	% prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
alpar@464	6355	% To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
alpar@464	6356	% \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
alpar@464	6357	% do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
alpar@464	6358	% your texinfo source file like this:
alpar@464	6359	% @tex
alpar@464	6360	% \global\normaloffset = -6mm
alpar@464	6361	% \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
alpar@464	6362	% @end tex
alpar@464	6363	\internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm}
alpar@464	6364	{\voffset}{\hoffset}%
alpar@464	6365	{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
alpar@464	6366	{297mm}{210mm}%
alpar@464	6367	%
alpar@464	6368	\tolerance = 700
alpar@464	6369	\hfuzz = 1pt
alpar@464	6370	\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
alpar@464	6371	\defbodyindent = 5mm
alpar@464	6372	}}
alpar@464	6373
alpar@464	6374	% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
alpar@464	6375	% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
alpar@464	6376	% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
alpar@464	6377	\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
alpar@464	6378	\parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
alpar@464	6379	\textleading = 12.5pt
alpar@464	6380	%
alpar@464	6381	\internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
alpar@464	6382	{\voffset}{\hoffset}%
alpar@464	6383	{\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
alpar@464	6384	{210mm}{148mm}%
alpar@464	6385	%
alpar@464	6386	\lispnarrowing = 0.2in
alpar@464	6387	\tolerance = 800
alpar@464	6388	\hfuzz = 1.2pt
alpar@464	6389	\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
alpar@464	6390	\defbodyindent = 2mm
alpar@464	6391	\tableindent = 12mm
alpar@464	6392	}}
alpar@464	6393
alpar@464	6394	% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
alpar@464	6395	\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
alpar@464	6396	\afourpaper
alpar@464	6397	\internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
alpar@464	6398	{\voffset}{4.6mm}%
alpar@464	6399	{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
alpar@464	6400	{297mm}{210mm}%
alpar@464	6401	%
alpar@464	6402	% Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
alpar@464	6403	\globaldefs = 0
alpar@464	6404	}}
alpar@464	6405
alpar@464	6406	% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
alpar@464	6407	\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
alpar@464	6408	\afourpaper
alpar@464	6409	\internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
alpar@464	6410	{\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
alpar@464	6411	{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
alpar@464	6412	{297mm}{210mm}%
alpar@464	6413	\globaldefs = 0
alpar@464	6414	}}
alpar@464	6415
alpar@464	6416	% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
alpar@464	6417	% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
alpar@464	6418	% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
alpar@464	6419	%
alpar@464	6420	\def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
alpar@464	6421	\def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
alpar@464	6422	\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
alpar@464	6423	\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
alpar@464	6424	\globaldefs = 1
alpar@464	6425	%
alpar@464	6426	\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
alpar@464	6427	\setleading{\textleading}%
alpar@464	6428	%
alpar@464	6429	\dimen0 = #1
alpar@464	6430	\advance\dimen0 by \voffset
alpar@464	6431	%
alpar@464	6432	\dimen2 = \hsize
alpar@464	6433	\advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
alpar@464	6434	%
alpar@464	6435	\internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
alpar@464	6436	{\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
alpar@464	6437	{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
alpar@464	6438	{\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
alpar@464	6439	}}
alpar@464	6440
alpar@464	6441	% Set default to letter.
alpar@464	6442	%
alpar@464	6443	\letterpaper
alpar@464	6444
alpar@464	6445
alpar@464	6446	\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
alpar@464	6447
alpar@464	6448	% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
alpar@464	6449	\catcode`\"=\other
alpar@464	6450	\catcode`\~=\other
alpar@464	6451	\catcode`\^=\other
alpar@464	6452	\catcode`\_=\other
alpar@464	6453	\catcode`\\|=\other
alpar@464	6454	\catcode`\<=\other
alpar@464	6455	\catcode`\>=\other
alpar@464	6456	\catcode`\+=\other
alpar@464	6457	\catcode`\$=\other
alpar@464	6458	\def\normaldoublequote{"}
alpar@464	6459	\def\normaltilde{~}
alpar@464	6460	\def\normalcaret{^}
alpar@464	6461	\def\normalunderscore{_}
alpar@464	6462	\def\normalverticalbar{\|}
alpar@464	6463	\def\normalless{<}
alpar@464	6464	\def\normalgreater{>}
alpar@464	6465	\def\normalplus{+}
alpar@464	6466	\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
alpar@464	6467
alpar@464	6468	% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
alpar@464	6469	% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
alpar@464	6470	% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
alpar@464	6471	%
alpar@464	6472	% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
alpar@464	6473	% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
alpar@464	6474	% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
alpar@464	6475	% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
alpar@464	6476	%
alpar@464	6477	\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
alpar@464	6478
alpar@464	6479	% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
alpar@464	6480	% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
alpar@464	6481	% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
alpar@464	6482	% this is not a problem.
alpar@464	6483	\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
alpar@464	6484
alpar@464	6485	% Turn off all special characters except @
alpar@464	6486	% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
alpar@464	6487	% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
alpar@464	6488	% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
alpar@464	6489
alpar@464	6490	\catcode`\"=\active
alpar@464	6491	\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
alpar@464	6492	\let"=\activedoublequote
alpar@464	6493	\catcode`\~=\active
alpar@464	6494	\def~{{\tt\char126}}
alpar@464	6495	\chardef\hat=`\^
alpar@464	6496	\catcode`\^=\active
alpar@464	6497	\def^{{\tt \hat}}
alpar@464	6498
alpar@464	6499	\catcode`\_=\active
alpar@464	6500	\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
alpar@464	6501	% Subroutine for the previous macro.
alpar@464	6502	\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
alpar@464	6503
alpar@464	6504	\catcode`\\|=\active
alpar@464	6505	\def\|{{\tt\char124}}
alpar@464	6506	\chardef \less=`\<
alpar@464	6507	\catcode`\<=\active
alpar@464	6508	\def<{{\tt \less}}
alpar@464	6509	\chardef \gtr=`\>
alpar@464	6510	\catcode`\>=\active
alpar@464	6511	\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
alpar@464	6512	\catcode`\+=\active
alpar@464	6513	\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
alpar@464	6514	\catcode`\$=\active
alpar@464	6515	\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
alpar@464	6516
alpar@464	6517	% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
alpar@464	6518	{\catcode`\==\active
alpar@464	6519	\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
alpar@464	6520
alpar@464	6521	\catcode`+=\active
alpar@464	6522	\catcode`\_=\active
alpar@464	6523
alpar@464	6524	% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
alpar@464	6525	% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
alpar@464	6526	% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
alpar@464	6527	% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
alpar@464	6528	\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
alpar@464	6529
alpar@464	6530	\catcode`\@=0
alpar@464	6531
alpar@464	6532	% \rawbackslashxx outputs one backslash character in current font,
alpar@464	6533	% as in \char`\\.
alpar@464	6534	\global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
alpar@464	6535
alpar@464	6536	% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \rawbackslashxx.
alpar@464	6537	% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
alpar@464	6538	% catcode other.
alpar@464	6539	{\catcode`\\=\active
alpar@464	6540	@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx}
alpar@464	6541	@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
alpar@464	6542	}
alpar@464	6543
alpar@464	6544	% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other.
alpar@464	6545	{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
alpar@464	6546
alpar@464	6547	% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
alpar@464	6548	\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
alpar@464	6549
alpar@464	6550	\catcode`\\=\active
alpar@464	6551
alpar@464	6552	% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
alpar@464	6553	% even after parsing them.
alpar@464	6554	@def@turnoffactive{%
alpar@464	6555	@let"=@normaldoublequote
alpar@464	6556	@let\=@realbackslash
alpar@464	6557	@let~=@normaltilde
alpar@464	6558	@let^=@normalcaret
alpar@464	6559	@let_=@normalunderscore
alpar@464	6560	@let\|=@normalverticalbar
alpar@464	6561	@let<=@normalless
alpar@464	6562	@let>=@normalgreater
alpar@464	6563	@let+=@normalplus
alpar@464	6564	@let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
alpar@464	6565	}
alpar@464	6566
alpar@464	6567	% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
alpar@464	6568	% the literal character `\'. (Thus, \ is not expandable when this is in
alpar@464	6569	% effect.)
alpar@464	6570	%
alpar@464	6571	@def@normalturnoffactive{@turnoffactive @let\=@normalbackslash}
alpar@464	6572
alpar@464	6573	% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
alpar@464	6574	% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
alpar@464	6575	@otherifyactive
alpar@464	6576
alpar@464	6577	% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
alpar@464	6578	% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
alpar@464	6579	% a backslash.
alpar@464	6580	%
alpar@464	6581	@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
alpar@464	6582	@global@let\ = @eatinput
alpar@464	6583
alpar@464	6584	% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
alpar@464	6585	% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
alpar@464	6586	% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
alpar@464	6587	% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
alpar@464	6588	% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
alpar@464	6589	%
alpar@464	6590	@gdef@fixbackslash{%
alpar@464	6591	@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
alpar@464	6592	@catcode`+=@active
alpar@464	6593	@catcode`@_=@active
alpar@464	6594	}
alpar@464	6595
alpar@464	6596	% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
alpar@464	6597	@escapechar = `@@
alpar@464	6598
alpar@464	6599	% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
alpar@464	6600	@catcode`@& = @other
alpar@464	6601	@catcode`@# = @other
alpar@464	6602	@catcode`@% = @other
alpar@464	6603
alpar@464	6604	@c Set initial fonts.
alpar@464	6605	@textfonts
alpar@464	6606	@rm
alpar@464	6607
alpar@464	6608
alpar@464	6609	@c Local variables:
alpar@464	6610	@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
alpar@464	6611	@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
alpar@464	6612	@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
alpar@464	6613	@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
alpar@464	6614	@c time-stamp-end: "}"
alpar@464	6615	@c End:

author	alpar
	Tue, 06 Jul 2004 10:07:48 +0000
changeset 694	2d87cefb35b2
permissions	-rw-r--r--